LG 55LV3700 User Manual Owner's SAC34134226 4 Eng
55LV3700 Owner's Manual SAC34134226_4 eng; Most comprehensive of product setup and usage. (English)
2016-05-24
User Manual: LG 55LV3700 Owner's Manual Most comprehensive of product setup and usage. (English)
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 172 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
- LICENSES
- IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
- TABLE OF CONTENTS
- ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
- REMOTE CONTROL
- WATCHING TV
- ENTERTAINMENT
- 3D Imaging (For 3D TV)
- CUSTOMIZING TV SETTINGS
- MAKING CONNECTIONS
- MAINTENANCE
- TROUBLESHOOTING
- SPECIFICATIONS
- IR CODES
- EXTERNAL CONTROL DEVICE SETUP
- Open Source License
- Untitled
www.lg.com
P/NO : SAC34134226 (1106-REV04)
OWNER’S MANUAL
LED LCD TV / LCD TV /
PLASMA TV
Please read this manual carefully before operating the
set and retain it for future reference.
LED LCD TV MODELS
42LV3700
47LV3700
55LV3700
42LV5400
47LV5400
55LV5400
LCD TV
MODELS
42LK530
47LK530
55LK530
42LK550
47LK550
PLASMA TV
MODELS
50PZ750
60PZ750
50PZ950
60PZ950
50PZ950U
60PZ950U
42LV5500
47LV5500
55LV5500
42LW5600
47LW5600
55LW5600
32LW5700
42LW5700
47LW5700
55LW5700
47LW6500
55LW6500
65LW6500
47LW9800
55LW9800
55LV9500
LICENSES
Supported licenses may differ by model. For more information about licenses, visit www.lg.com.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc. This is
an official DivX Certified® device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for
more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered
in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your
registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu. Go to
vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your registration.
“DivX Certified® to play DivX® and DivX Plus ™ HD (H.264/MKV) video up to
1080p HD including premium content.”
“DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are
used under license.”
“Covered by one or more of the following U.S. patents :
7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274”
NOTE
Plasma
: Plasma TV
LCD
: LED LCD TV, LCD TV
Image shown may differ from your TV.
Your TV’s OSD (On Screen Display) may differ slightly from that shown in this manual.
The available menus and options may differ from the input source or product model that you are
using.
2
ENG
ENGLISH
LICENSES
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Always comply with the following precautions to avoid dangerous situations and ensure peak performance
of your product.
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR
BACK). NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER TO QUALIFIED SERVICE
PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead
symbol, within an equilateral triangle,
is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage”
within the product’s enclosure that may be
of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of
electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an
equilateral triangle is intended to alert
the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing)
instructions in the literature accompanying
the appliance.
- TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE AND
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS
PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
WARNING/CAUTION
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with a dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install
in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such
as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce
heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the
polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized
plug has two blades with one wider than the
other. A grounding type plug has two blades
and a third grounding prong. The wide blade
or the third prong are provided for your safety.
If the provided plug does not fit into your
outlet, consult an electrician for replacement
of the obsolete outlet (Can differ by country).
3
ENG
ENGLISH
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Protect the power cord from being walked on
or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience
receptacles, and the point where they exit
from the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified
by the manufacturer.
Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket,
or table specified by the manufacturer, or
sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used,
use caution when moving the cart/apparatus
combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning
storms or when unused for long periods of
time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service
personnel. Servicing is required when
the apparatus has been damaged in any
way, such as power-supply cord or plug is
damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus
has been exposed to rain or moisture, does
not operate normally, or has been dropped.
Never touch this apparatus or antenna during
a thunder or lightning storm.
When mounting a TV on the wall, make sure
not to install the TV by hanging the power
and signal cables on the back of the TV.
Do not allow an impact shock or any objects
to fall into the product, and do not drop
anything onto the screen.
CAUTION concerning the Power Cord
(Can differ by country):
It is recommended that appliances be
placed upon a dedicated circuit; that is, a
single outlet circuit which powers only that
appliance and has no additional outlets or
branch circuits. Check the specification page
of this owner’s manual to be certain. Do not
connect too many appliances to the same
AC power outlet as this could result in fire or
electric shock. Do not overload wall outlets.
Overloaded wall outlets, loose or damaged
wall outlets, extension cords, frayed power
cords, or damaged or cracked wire insulation
are dangerous. Any of these conditions could
result in electric shock or fire. Periodically
examine the cord of your appliance, and
if its appearance indicates damage or
deterioration, unplug it, discontinue use of
the appliance, and have the cord replaced
with an exact replacement part by an
authorized service. Protect the power cord
from physical or mechanical abuse, such as
being twisted, kinked, pinched, closed in a
door, or walked upon. Pay particular attention
to plugs, wall outlets, and the point where
the cord exits the appliance. Do not move
the TV with the power cord plugged in. Do
not use a damaged or loose power cord. Be
sure do grasp the plug when unplugging the
power cord. Do not pull on the power cord
to unplug the TV.
Warning - To reduce the risk of fire or
electrical shock, do not expose this product
to rain, moisture or other liquids. Do not
touch the TV with wet hands. Do not install
this product near flammable objects such
as gasoline or candles, or expose the TV to
direct air conditioning.
4
ENG
ENGLISH
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Do not expose to dripping or splashing and
do not place objects filled with liquids, such
as vases, cups, etc. on or over the apparatus
(e.g. on shelves above the unit).
Grounding
Ensure that you connect the earth ground
wire to prevent possible electric shock
(i.e. a TV with a three-prong grounded AC
plug must be connected to a three-prong
grounded AC outlet). If grounding methods
are not possible, have a qualified electrician
install a separate circuit breaker. Do not try to
ground the unit by connecting it to telephone
wires, lightening rods, or gas pipes.
Short-circuit Breaker
Power Supply
DISCONNECTING DEVICE FROM THE MAIN
POWER
The power outlet must remain readily
accessed in the event the device needs to
be unplugged.
As long as this unit is connected to the AC
wall outlet, it is not disconnected from the
AC power source even if the unit is turned
off.
Do not attempt to modify this product in any
way without written authorization from LG
Electronics. Unauthorized modification could
void the user’s authority to operate this
product.
ANTENNAS Outdoor antenna grounding
(Can differ by country):
If an outdoor antenna is installed, follow
the precautions below. An outdoor antenna
system should not be located in the vicinity
of overhead power lines or other electric light
or power circuits, or where it can come in
contact with such power lines or circuits as
death or serious injury can occur. Be sure the
antenna system is grounded so as to provide
some protection against voltage surges
and built-up static charges. Section 810 of
the National Electrical Code (NEC) in the
U.S.A. provides information with respect to
proper grounding of the mast and supporting
structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to
an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding
conductors, location of antenna discharge
unit, connection to grounding electrodes and
requirements for the grounding electrode.
Antenna grounding according to the National
Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70
NEC: National Electrical Code
Ground Clamp
Antenna Lead in Wire
Antenna Discharge Unit
(NEC Section 810-20)
Grounding Conductor
(NEC Section 810-21)
Power Service Grounding
Electrode System
(NEC Art 250, Part H)
Electric Service
Equipment
Ground Clamp
Cleaning
When cleaning, unplug the power cord and
wipe gently with a soft cloth to prevent
scratching. Do not spray water or other
liquids directly on the TV as electric shock
may occur. Do not clean with chemicals
such as alcohol, thinners or benzine.
Moving
Make sure the product is turned off,
unplugged and all cables have been
removed. It may take 2 or more people to
carry larger TVs. Do not press or put stress
on the front panel of the TV.
Ventilation
Install your TV where there is proper
ventilation. Do not install in a confined
space such as a bookcase. Do not cover the
product with cloth or other materials while
plugged. Do not install in excessively dusty
places.
If you smell smoke or other odours coming
from the TV, unplug the power cord contact
an authorized service center.
Do not press strongly upon the panel with
hand or sharp object such as nail, pencil or
pen, or make a scratch on it.
Keep the product away from direct sunlight.
5
ENG
ENGLISH
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Dot Defect
The Plasma or LCD panel is a high
technology product with resolution of two
million to six million pixels. In a very few
cases, you could see fine dots on the screen
while you’re viewing the TV. Those dots
are deactivated pixels and do not affect the
performance and reliability of the TV.
Generated Sound
“Cracking” noise: A cracking noise that
occurs when watching or turning off the TV
is generated by plastic thermal contraction
due to temperature and humidity. This noise
is common for products where thermal
deformation is required.
Electrical circuit humming/panel buzzing: A
low level noise is generated from a high-
speed switching circuit, which supplies a
large amount of current to operate a product.
It varies depending on the product.
This generated sound does not affect the
performance and reliability of the product.
Take care not to touch the ventilation
openings. When watching the TV for a long
period, the ventilation openings may become
hot. This does not affect the performance of
the product or cause defects in the product.
Viewing 3D Imaging (For 3D TV)
- If you watch the 3D imaging too closely or
for a long period of time, it may harm your
eyesight.
- Watching the TV or playing video games
that incorporate 3D imaging with the 3D
glasses for a long period of time can cause
drowsiness, headaches or fatigue to you
and/or your eyes. If you have a headache,
or otherwise feel fatigued or drowsy, stop
watching the TV and have a rest.
- Pregnant woman, seniors, persons with
heart problems or persons who experience
frequent drowsiness should refrain from
watching 3D TV.
- Some 3D imaging may cause you to duck
or dodge the image displayed in the video.
Therefore, it is best if you do not watch 3D
TV near fragile objects or near any objects
that can be knocked over easily.
- Please prevent children under the age of
5 from watching 3D TV. It may affect their
vision development.
- Warning for photosensitization seizure: Some
viewers may experience a seizure or epilepsy
when exposed to certain factors, including
flashing lights or images in TV or video
games. If you or anybody from your family
has a history of epilepsy or seizure, please
consult with your doctor before watching 3D
TV.
Also certain symptoms can occur in
unspecified conditions without any previous
history. If you experience any of the following
symptoms, immediately stop watching the
3D imaging and consult a doctor: dizziness or
light-headedness, visual transition or altered
vision, visual or facial instability, such as eye
or muscle twitching, unconscious action,
convulsion, loss of conscience, confusion
or disorientation, loss of directional sense,
cramps, or nausea. Parents should monitor
their children, including teenagers, for these
symptoms as they may be more sensitive to
the effects of watching 3D TV.
Risk of photosensitization seizure can be
reduced with the following actions.
- Take frequent breaks from watching 3D TV.
- For those who have vision that is different
in each eye, they should watch the TV after
taking vision correction measures.
- Watch the TV so that your eyes are on the
same level as the 3D screen and refrain from
sitting too closely to the TV.
- Do not watch the 3D imaging when tired or
sick, and avoid watching the 3D imaging for a
long period of time.
- Do not wear the 3D glasses for any other
purpose than viewing 3D imaging on a 3D TV.
- Some viewers may feel disoriented after
watching 3D TV. Therefore, after you watch
3D TV, take a moment to regain awareness
of your situation before moving.
6
ENG
ENGLISH
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
LCD
If the TV feels cold to the touch, there may
be a small “flicker” when it is turned on. This
is normal, there is nothing wrong with TV.
Some minute dot defects may be visible on
the screen, appearing as tiny red, green, or
blue spots. However, they have no adverse
effect on the TV’s performance. Avoid
touching the LCD screen or holding your
finger(s) against it for long periods of time.
Doing so may produce some temporary
distortion effects on the screen.
DISPOSAL (Hg lamp only used in LCD TVs)
The fluorescent lamp used in this product contains
a small amount of mercury. Do not dispose of this
product with general household waste. Disposal of
this product must be carried out in accordance to
the regulations of your local authority.
For USA
NOTE TO CABLE/TV INSTALLER
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the
National Electric Code (U.S.A.). The code provides
guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular,
specifies that the cable ground shall be connected
to the grounding system of the building, as close
to the point of the cable entry as practical.
7
ENG
ENGLISH
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2 LICENSES
3 IMPORTANT SAFETY IN-
STRUCTIONS
8 TABLE OF CONTENTS
10 ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
10 Unpacking
13 Optional Extras
14 Parts and buttons
22 Lifting and moving the TV
22 Setting up the TV
22 - Attaching the stand
28 - Mounting on a table
30 - Mounting on a wall
31 - Tidying cables
32 REMOTE CONTROL
36 Magic Motion Remote Control Functions
37 - Registering Magic Motion Remote
Control
37 - How to use Magic Motion Remote
Control
37 - Precautions to Take when Using the
Magic Motion Remote Control
38 WATCHING TV
38 Connecting to an antenna or cable
38 - Connecting an antenna or basic cable
38 - Connecting a cable box
39 Turning the TV on for the first time
40 Watching TV
41 Accessing Home Menu
42 Managing channels
42 - Setting up channels
43 - Using favorite channels
44 - Checking current program info
45 Using additional options
45 - Adjusting aspect ratio
46 - Changing AV modes
46 - Using the input list
47 Using the quick menu
48 ENTERTAINMENT
48 Network Connection
48 - Connecting to a wired network
49 - Connecting to a wireless network
50 - When a security code is already set
53 - Network Status
54 Premium Account Function
54 - Notice
56 LG Apps function
56 - Registration LG Apps
57 - Sign in with LG Apps account
58 - Using LG Apps
59 - Using My Apps
60 Search
61 Web Browser Function
61 - Using Web Browser
62 - Browsing Favorite Websites
62 - Browsing Websites by Directly Entering
Address
63 - Viewing Visited Website List
64 Smart Share Function
64 - Connecting USB storage devices
65 - Connecting DLNA DMP (Digital Living
Network Alliance, Digital Media Player)
68 - Connecting DLNA DMR (Digital Living
Network Alliance, Digital Media Render)
69 - Browsing files
70 - Viewing Videos
73 - DivX registration code
74 - Viewing Photos
76 - Listening to music
8
ENG
ENGLISH
TABLE OF CONTENTS
78 Media Link Function
78 - Media Link Connection
79 - Using Media Link
79 - Viewing Movies
80 - Using Music Section
80 - Using TV Program Section
81 - Installing Plug-Ins
82 3D IMAGING (FOR 3D TV)
82 3D Technology
82 - When watching 3D imaging
83 - When using 3D Glasses
83 - 3D Imaging Viewing Range (
Plasma
)
84 Viewing 3D Imaging
84 - Setting 3D Imaging
86 CUSTOMIZING TV SETTINGS
86 The SETUP Menu
87 Customizing Settings
87 - CHANNEL Settings
88 - PICTURE Settings
93 - AUDIO Settings
95 - TIME Settings
96 - LOCK Settings
98 - OPTION Settings
101 - NETWORK Settings
102 - SUPPORT Settings
103 MAKING CONNECTIONS
104 Connection Overview
105 Connecting to a HD receiver, DVD, or
VCR player
105 - HDMI Connection
106 - DVI to HDMI Connection
107 - Component Connection
108 - Composite Connection
110 Connecting to a PC
110 - HDMI Connection
111 - DVI to HDMI Connection
112 - RGB Connection
113 Connecting to an Audio System
113 - Digital Optical Audio Connection
115 Connecting to a USB
115 Connecting to a Headphone (
LCD
)
116 Connecting the Wireless Media Box
117 SIMPLINK Connection
117 - Activating and Using the SIMPLINK
menus
118 MAINTENANCE
118 Updating the TV Firmware
119 Cleaning Your TV
119 - Screen and frame
119 - Cabinet and stand
119 - Power cord
119 Preventing “Image burn” or “Burn-in” on
your TV screen
120 TROUBLESHOOTING
122 SPECIFICATIONS
130 IR CODES
132 EXTERNAL CONTROL DEVICE
SETUP
140 OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
9
ENG
ENGLISH
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
Unpacking
Check your product box for the following items. If there are any missing accessories, contact the local
dealer where you purchased your product. The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual
product and item.
Remote control,
Batteries (AAA)
Owner’s manual,
CD manual
Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials
CD
Polishing cloth1
(Depending on model)
Cleansing Cloths (Mitt)2
(Depending on model)
Magic Motion Remote Control3,
Strap,
Batteries (AA)
(Except LV3700, LV5400,
LW5700, LK530, LK550 series
FREEZE
RATIO
L/R SELECT
ENTER
BACK EXIT
Q.MENU
INFO
MENU
CHVOL
P
A
G
E
FAV
3D
MUTE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8
0
9
MARK
LIST
FLASHBK
ENERGY
SAVING
TV
AV MODE
INPUT
1 Gently wipe the spots on the cabinet with the polishing cloth.
2 Wipe spots on the exterior only with the cleansing cloths.
Do not wipe roughly when removing stains. Excessive pressure
may cause scratches or discoloration.
For cleaning front frame, please slowly wipe in one direction
after spraying water 1-2 times on cleansing cloths. Please
remove excessive moisture after cleaning. Excessive moisture
may cause water stains on the frame.
3 Sold seperately for LV3700, LV5400, LW5700, LK530, LK550 series.
Water
CAUTION
Do not use any unapproved items to ensure the safety and product life span.
Any damages or injuries by using unapproved items are not covered by the warranty.
In case of some model, the thin film on screen is a part of TV, So don’t take it off.
NOTE
The items supplied with your product may vary depending on the model.
Product specifications or contents of this manual may be changed without prior notice due to
upgrade of product functions.
New features may be added to this TV in the future.
10
ENG
ENGLISH
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
PZ750, PZ950, PZ950U series
Screw for assembly
(50PZ750/950/950U)
Screw for assembly
(60PZ750/950/950U)
Cable holder Power cord holder
Power cord Wireless LAN for
Broadband/DLNA Adaptor
(AN-WF100)
(PZ950, PZ950U series)
Ferrite Core
(Depending on model)
Protection cover,
Tape
3D Glasses1 (AG-S250)
(PZ950U series)
M4 x 26
x 4
M5 x 14.5
x 3
M4 x 28
x 4
M5 x 14.5
x 4
LV3700, LV5400, LV5500, LV9500, LW5600, LW5700, LW6500, LW9800 series
Screw for assembly
(LV3700, LV5400, LV5500,
LW5600, LW5700 series,
47/55LW6500)
Screw for assembly
(65LW6500)
Screw for assembly
(LV9500, LW9800 series)
Screw for fixing
(32LW5700)
Composite gender cable Component gender cable Cable holder
(Depending on model)
Wireless LAN for
Broadband/DLNA Adaptor
(AN-WF100)
(Except LV9500, LW9800
series)
FPR 3D Glasses1
(LW5600, LW5700, LW6500, LW9800 series)
M4 x 12
x 8
M4 x 16
x 9
M4 x 16
x 8
1 The number of 3D glasses may differ depending on the model or country.
11
ENG
ENGLISH
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
NOTE
(
Plasma
) How to use the ferrite core
1 Use the ferrite core to reduce the electromagnetic interference in the LAN cable.
Wind the LAN cable on the ferrite core once. Place the ferrite core close to the TV.
[to an External device] [to the TV]
[Figure 1] [Cross Section of
Ferrite Core]
2 Use the ferrite core to reduce the electromagnetic interference in the PC audio cable.
Wind the PC audio cable on the ferrite core thrice. Place the ferrite core close to the TV.
[to an External device]
10 mm (+/-5 mm)
[to the TV]
[Figure 2] [Cross Section of
Ferrite Core]
3 Use the ferrite core to reduce the electromagnetic interference in the power cable.
Wind the power cable on the ferrite core once. Place the ferrite core close to the TV and a wall plug.
[to a wall plug] [to the TV]
[Figure 3] [Cross Section of
Ferrite Core]
- If there is one ferrite core, follow as shown in Figure 1.
- If there are two ferrite cores, follow as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
- If there are three ferrite cores, follow as shown in Figures 1 and 3.
- If there are four ferrite cores, follow as shown in Figures 1, 2 and 3.
(
LCD
) For an optimal connection, HDMI cables and USB devices should have bezels less than 10 mm
(0.39 inch) thick and 18 mm (0.7 inch) width.
B
AA
B
*A 10 mm (0.39 inch)
*B 18 mm (0.7 inch)
LK530, LK550 series
Screw for assembly Protection cover Power cord Screw for fixing
(42LK530, 42LK550)
Composite gender cable Component gender cable Wireless LAN for
Broadband/DLNA Adaptor
(AN-WF100)
M4 x 20
x 8
12
ENG
ENGLISH
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
Optional Extras
Optional extras can be changed or modified for quality improvement without any notification.
Contact your dealer for buying these items.
These device only works with compatible LG LED LCD TV, LCD TV, or Plasma TV.
Wireless Media Box1
(AN-WL100W)
3D Glasses2
(AG-S230, AG-S250, AG-S270)
Wireless LAN for Broadband/DLNA
Adaptor3
(AN-WF100)
Magic Motion Remote
(AN-MR200)
D-sub 15 pin signal cable4FPR 3D Glasses5
(AG-F2**)
1 Supports for LV3700, LV5400, LV5500, LV9500, LW5600, LW5700, LW6500, LW9800, PZ750, PZ950,
PZ950U series
2 Supports for PZ750, PZ950, PZ950U series
3 Unnecessary for LV9500, LW9800 series
4 When using the VGA (D-sub 15 pin signal cable) PC connection, use the shielded signal interface cable
with a ferrite core to maintain standards compliance for the product.
5 Supports for LW5600, LW5700, LW6500, LW9800 series
The model name or design may be changed depending on the upgrade of product functions,
manufacturer’s circumstances or policies.
13
ENG
ENGLISH
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
Parts and buttons
Touch button2Description
/ ITurns the power on or off.
INPUT Changes the input source.
HOME Accesses the Home menu, or saves your input and exits the menus.
ENTER Selects the highlighted menu option or confirms an input
- VOL + Adjusts the volume level.
v
CH
^
Scrolls through the saved channels.
1 Intelligent sensor - Adjusts the image quality and brightness based on the surrounding environment.
2 All of the buttons are touch sensitive and can be operated through simple touch with your finger.
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
AV IN2
R
/DVI IN
1 (ARC) 2 3 4
USB IN 1
USB IN 2/USB Apps
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AV IN1
COMPON ENT IN
ANTENNA
/CABLE IN
VIDEO
AUDIO
Y
2
1
LP
B
P
R
R
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL&SERVICE)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
WIRELESS
CONTROL
RGB IN (PC)
LAN
REMOTE
CONTROL IN
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
Rear Connection
panel (See p.103)
PZ750, PZ950, PZ950U series
ENTER CH
VOL
HOME
INPUT
Speakers
Screen
Touch buttons2
Remote control and
intelligent1 sensors
Power indicator
14
ENG
ENGLISH
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
WIRELESS
CONTROL
RS-232C IN (CONTROL&SERVICE)
COMPONENT
IN1
VIDEO
AUDIO
Y LP
B
P
R
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AV IN1
ꔡ
IN 1 (ARC)
/DVI
IN 2
/DVI
IN 3
/DVI
IN 4
/DVI
LAN
RGB IN (PC)
OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
AV IN 2
AUDIO / VIDEO
COMPONENT IN 2
AUDIO / Y PB PR
H/P
HDD IN
USB IN 1 USB Apps
USB IN 2
Touch button2Description
/ ITurns the power on or off.
INPUT Changes the input source.
HOME Accesses the Home menu, or saves your input and exits the menus.
ENTER Selects the highlighted menu option or confirms an input
- VOL + Adjusts the volume level.
v
CH
^
Scrolls through the saved channels.
1 Intelligent sensor - Adjusts the image quality and brightness based on the surrounding environment.
2 All of the buttons are touch sensitive and can be operated through simple touch with your finger.
LV5400, LV5500, LW6500 series
ENTER
CH VOL HOME
H
INPUT
ENTER
CH VOL HOME
H
INPUT
Speakers
or
Remote control and
intelligent1 sensors
Power indicator
Screen
Touch buttons2
Rear Connection panel
(See p.103)
NOTE
You can set the power indicator light to on or off by selecting OPTION in the Home menu - SETUP.
15
ENG
ENGLISH
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
NOTE
You can set the power indicator light to on or off by selecting OPTION in the Home menu - SETUP.
Button Description
/ ITurns the power on or off.
INPUT Changes the input source.
HOME Accesses the Home menu, or saves your input and exits the menus.
ENTER Selects the highlighted menu option or confirms an input
- VOL + Adjusts the volume level.
v
CH
^
Scrolls through the saved channels.
1 Intelligent sensor - Adjusts the image quality and brightness based on the surrounding environment.
WIRELESS
CONTROL
RS-232C IN (CONTROL&SERVICE)
COMPONENT
IN1
VIDEO
AUDIO
Y LP
B
P
R
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AV IN1
ꔡ
IN 1 (ARC)
/DVI
IN 2
/DVI
IN 3
/DVI
IN 4
/DVI
LAN
RGB IN (PC)
OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
AV IN 2
AUDIO / VIDEO
COMPONENT IN 2
AUDIO / Y PB PR
H/P
HDD IN
USB IN 1 USB Apps
USB IN 2
LW5700 series
ENTER
CH
VOL
HOME
INPUT
H
Speakers
Screen
Buttons
Rear Connection panel
(See p.103)
Remote control and intelligent1 sensors,
Power indicator
16
ENG
ENGLISH
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
NOTE
You can set the power indicator light to on or off by selecting OPTION in the Home menu - SETUP.
Touch button2Description
/ ITurns the power on or off.
INPUT Changes the input source.
HOME Accesses the Home menu, or saves your input and exits the menus.
ENTER Selects the highlighted menu option or confirms an input
- VOL + Adjusts the volume level.
v
CH
^
Scrolls through the saved channels.
1 Intelligent sensor - Adjusts the image quality and brightness based on the surrounding environment.
2 All of the buttons are touch sensitive and can be operated through simple touch with your finger.
WIRELESS
CONTROL
RS-232C IN (CONTROL&SERVICE)
COMPONENT
IN1
VIDEO
AUDIO
Y LP
B
P
R
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AV IN1
ꔡ
IN 1 (ARC)
/DVI
IN 2
/DVI
IN 3
/DVI
IN 4
/DVI
LAN
RGB IN (PC)
OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
AV IN 2
AUDIO / VIDEO
COMPONENT IN 2
AUDIO / Y PB PR
H/P
HDD IN
USB IN 1 USB Apps
USB IN 2
LW5600 series
Remote control and
intelligent1 sensors
Power indicator
ENTER
CH VOL HOME INPUT
Speakers
Screen
Touch buttons2
Rear Connection panel
(See p.103)
17
ENG
ENGLISH
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
NOTE
You can set the power indicator light to on or off by selecting OPTION in the Home menu - SETUP.
Touch button2Description
/ ITurns the power on or off.
INPUT Changes the input source.
HOME Accesses the Home menu, or saves your input and exits the menus.
ENTER Selects the highlighted menu option or confirms an input
- VOL + Adjusts the volume level.
v
CH
^
Scrolls through the saved channels.
1 Intelligent sensor - Adjusts the image quality and brightness based on the surrounding environment.
2 All of the buttons are touch sensitive and can be operated through simple touch with your finger.
WIRELESS
CONTROL
RS-232C IN (CONTROL&SERVICE)
COMPONENT
IN1
VIDEO
AUDIO
Y LP
B
P
R
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AV IN1
ꔡ
IN 1 (ARC)
/DVI
IN 2
/DVI
IN 3
/DVI
IN 4
/DVI
LAN
RGB IN (PC)
OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
AV IN 2
AUDIO / VIDEO
COMPONENT IN 2
AUDIO / Y PB PR
H/P
HDD IN
USB IN 1 USB Apps
USB IN 2
LV9500, LW9800 series
ENTER
CH VOL HOME
H
INPUT
Speakers
Screen
Touch buttons2
Rear Connection panel
(See p.103)
Remote control and
intelligent1 sensors
Power indicator
18
ENG
ENGLISH
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
NOTE
You can set the power indicator light to on or off by selecting OPTION in the Home menu - SETUP.
Touch button2Description
/ ITurns the power on or off.
INPUT Changes the input source.
HOME Accesses the Home menu, or saves your input and exits the menus.
ENTER Selects the highlighted menu option or confirms an input
- VOL + Adjusts the volume level.
v
CH
^
Scrolls through the saved channels.
1 Intelligent sensor - Adjusts the image quality and brightness based on the surrounding environment.
2 All of the buttons are touch sensitive and can be operated through simple touch with your finger.
WIRELESS
CONTROL
RS-232C IN (CONTROL&SERVICE)
ꔡ
RGB IN (PC)
OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI)
LAN
COMPONENT
IN1
VIDEO
AUDIO
Y LP
B
P
R
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AV IN1
ANTENNA/CABLE IN
AV IN 2
AUDIO / VIDEO
COMPONENT IN 2
AUDIO / Y PB PR
IN 1 (ARC)
/DVI
IN 2
/DVI
IN 3
/DVI
USB IN 1
USB IN 2/USB Apps
H/P
LV3700 series
ENTER
CH VOL HOME INPUT
ENTER
CH VOL HOME INPUT
Speakers
Screen
Touch buttons2
Rear Connection panel
(See p.103)
Remote control and
intelligent1 sensors
Power indicator
19
ENG
ENGLISH
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
LK550 series
NOTE
You can set the power indicator light to on or off by selecting OPTION in the Home menu - SETUP.
Touch button2Description
/ ITurns the power on or off.
INPUT Changes the input source.
HOME Accesses the Home menu, or saves your input and exits the menus.
ENTER Selects the highlighted menu option or confirms an input
- VOL + Adjusts the volume level.
v
CH
^
Scrolls through the saved channels.
1 Intelligent sensor - Adjusts the image quality and brightness based on the surrounding environment.
2 All of the buttons are touch sensitive and can be operated through simple touch with your finger.
RS-232C IN (CONTROL&SERVICE)
RGB IN (PC)
OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI)
LAN
COMPONENT
IN1
VIDEO
AUDIO
Y LP
B
P
R
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AV IN1
ANTENNA/CABLE IN
AV IN 2
AUDIO / VIDEO
COMPONENT IN 2
AUDIO / Y PB PR
USB IN 1 USB IN 2
USB Apps
H/P
IN 1 (ARC)
/DVI
IN 2
/DVI
IN 3
/DVI
ENTER
CH VOL HOME INPUT
Speakers
Screen
Remote control and
intelligent1 sensors
Power indicator
Touch buttons2
Rear Connection panel
(See p.103)
Side connection panel
20
ENG
ENGLISH
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
Button Description
/ ITurns the power on or off.
INPUT Changes the input source.
HOME Accesses the Home menu, or saves your input and exits the menus.
ENTER Selects the highlighted menu option or confirms an input
- VOL + Adjusts the volume level.
v
CH
^
Scrolls through the saved channels.
1 Intelligent sensor - Adjusts the image quality and brightness based on the surrounding environment.
RS-232C IN (CONTROL&SERVICE)
RGB IN (PC)
OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI)
LAN
COMPONENT
IN1
VIDEO
AUDIO
Y LP
B
P
R
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AV IN1
ANTENNA/CABLE IN
AV IN 2
AUDIO / VIDEO
COMPONENT IN 2
AUDIO / Y PB PR
USB IN 1 USB IN 2
USB Apps
H/P
IN 1 (ARC)
/DVI
IN 2
/DVI
IN 3
/DVI
LK530 series
Remote control and
intelligent1 sensors
ENTER
CH
VOL
HOME
INPUT
Speakers
Screen
Buttons
Power indicator
Rear Connection panel
(See p.103)
Side connection panel
21
ENG
ENGLISH
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
Lifting and moving the TV
When moving or lifting the TV, read the following
to prevent the TV from being scratched or
damaged and for safe transportation regardless of
its type and size.
CAUTION
Avoid touching the screen at all times, as
this may result in damage to the screen.
It is recommended to move the TV in the
box or packing material that the TV originally
came in.
Before moving or lifting the TV, disconnect
the power cord and all cables.
When holding the TV, the screen should face
away from you to avoid damage.
Hold the top and bottom of the TV frame
firmly. Make sure not to hold the transparent
part, speaker, or speaker grill area.
When transporting a large TV, there should
be at least 2 people.
When transporting the TV by hand, hold the
TV as shown in the following illustration.
When transporting the TV, do not expose the
TV to jolts or excessive vibration.
When transporting the TV, keep the TV
upright, never turn the TV on its side or tilt
towards the left or right.
Setting up the TV
Put your TV on a pedestal stand and mount the TV
on a table or wall.
Attaching the stand
If you are not mounting the TV to a wall, use the
following instructions to attach the stand.
PZ750, PZ950, PZ950U series
1 Lay the TV with the screen side down on a flat
surface.
CAUTION
Lay a foam mat or soft protective cloth
on the surface to protect the screen from
damage. Make sure no objects press
against the screen.
2 Assemble the parts of the stand body with the
stand base of the TV.
Model Screw for
assembly
Number of
screws
50PZ750,50PZ950,
50PZ950U
M5 x 14.5 3
60PZ750, 60PZ950,
60PZ950U
M5 x 14.5 4
Stand Body
Stand Base
Stand Base
Stand Body
22
ENG
ENGLISH
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
3 Secure the TV and the stand with the 4
screws.
Model Screw for
assembly
Number of
screws
50PZ750, 50PZ950,
50PZ950U
M4 x 26 4
60PZ750, 60PZ950,
60PZ950U
M4 x 28 4
CAUTION
Tighten the screws firmly to prevent
the TV from tilting forward. Do not over
tighten.
To detach the stand,
1 Lay the TV with the screen side down on a flat
surface.
2 Remove the 4 screws and pull the stand away
from the TV.
3 Push the supplied protection cover into the
opening at the bottom of the TV until it locks in
place.
Attach the protection cover tape.
- This will protect the opening from
accumulating dust and dirt.
- When installing the wall mounting bracket,
use the protection cover.
Protection cover
Protection cover tape
23
ENG
ENGLISH
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
4 Secure the TV and the stand with the screws.
Model Screw for
assembly
Number of
screws
LV3700, LV5400,
LV5500, LW5600,
LW5700 series,
47/55LW6500
M4 x 12 4
65LW6500 M4 x 16 5
CAUTION
Tighten the screws firmly to prevent
the TV from tilting forward. Do not over
tighten.
To detach the stand,
1 Lay the TV with the screen side down on a flat
surface.
2 Remove the 4 screws and pull the stand away
from the TV.
LV3700, LV5400, LV5500, LW5600,
LW5700, LW6500 series
1 Lay the TV with the screen side down on a flat
surface.
CAUTION
Lay a foam mat or soft protective cloth
on the surface to protect the screen from
damage. Make sure no objects press
against the screen.
2 Assemble the parts of the stand body with the
stand base of the TV.
Model Screw for
assembly
Number of
screws
LV3700, LV5400,
LV5500, LW5600,
LW5700 series,
47/55LW6500
M4 x 12 4
65LW6500 M4 x 16 4
Stand Base
Stand Body
3 Assemble the TV as shown.
24
ENG
ENGLISH
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
LV9500, LW9800 series
1 Lay the TV with the screen side down on a flat
surface.
CAUTION
Lay a foam mat or soft protective cloth
on the surface to protect the screen from
damage. Make sure no objects press
against the screen.
2 Assemble the parts of the stand body with the
stand base of the TV.
Screw for assembly Number of screws
M4 x 16 4
Stand Base
Stand Body
3 Assemble the parts of the stand rear cover
with the TV.
Stand Rear Cover
4 Secure the TV and the stand with the 4
screws.
Screw for assembly Number of screws
M4 x 16 4
CAUTION
Tighten the screws firmly to prevent
the TV from tilting forward. Do not over
tighten.
To detach the stand,
1 Lay the TV with the screen side down on a flat
surface.
2 Remove the 4 screws and pull the stand away
from the TV.
25
ENG
ENGLISH
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
LK530, LK550 series
1 Lay the TV with the screen side down on a flat
surface.
CAUTION
Lay a foam mat or soft protective cloth
on the surface to protect the screen from
damage. Make sure no objects press
against the screen.
2 Assemble the parts of the stand body with the
stand base of the TV.
Screw for assembly Number of screws
M4 x 20 4
Stand Base
Stand Body
Stand Base
Stand Body
Front
3 Assemble the TV as shown.
4 Secure the TV and the stand with the 4
screws.
Screw for assembly Number of screws
M4 x 20 4
CAUTION
Tighten the screws firmly to prevent
the TV from tilting forward. Do not over
tighten.
To detach the stand,
1 Lay the TV with the screen side down on a flat
surface.
2 Remove the 4 screws and pull the stand away
from the TV.
26
ENG
ENGLISH
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
3 Push the supplied protection cover into the
opening at the bottom of the TV until it locks in
place.
This will protect the opening from accumulating
dust and dirt.
When installing the wall mounting bracket, use
the Protection cover.
Protection cover
27
ENG
ENGLISH
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
Mounting on a table
1 Lift and tilt the TV into its upright position on a
table.
- Leave a 10 cm (4 inch) (minimum) space from
the wall for proper ventilation.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
(4 inch)
2 Connect the power cord to a wall outlet.
CAUTION
Do not place the TV near or on sources
of heat, as this may result in fire or other
damage.
NOTE
Swivel 20 degrees to the left or right and
adjust the angle of the TV to suit your
view.
2020
Securing the TV to a table
(For 32LW5700, 42LK530, 42LK550)
Fix the TV to a table to prevent from tilting
forward, damage, and potential injury.
Mount the TV on a table, and then insert and
tighten the supplied screw on the rear of the
stand.
WARNING
To prevent TV from falling over, the TV
should be securely attached to the floor/wall
per installation instructions. Tipping, shaking,
or rocking the TV may cause injury.
28
ENG
ENGLISH
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
Securing the TV to a wall (optional)
1 Insert and tighten the eye-bolts, or TV brackets
and bolts on the back of the TV.
- If there are bolts inserted at the eye-bolts
position, remove the bolts first.
2 Mount the wall brackets with the bolts to the
wall.
Match the location of the wall bracket and the
eye-bolts on the rear of the TV.
3 Connect the eye-bolts and wall brackets tightly
with a sturdy rope.
Make sure to keep the rope horizontal with the
flat surface.
CAUTION
Make sure that children do not climb on or
hang on the TV.
NOTE
Use a platform or cabinet that is strong and
large enough to support the TV securely.
Brackets, bolts and ropes are optional. You
can obtain additional accessories from your
local dealer.
Using the Kensington security system (optional)
The Kensington security system connector is
located at the rear of the TV. For more information
of installation and using, refer to the manual
provided with the Kensington security system or
visit
http://www.kensington.com
.
Connect the Kensington security system cable
between the TV and a table.
NOTE
The Kensington security system is optional.
You can obtain additional accessories from
your local dealer.
29
ENG
ENGLISH
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
Model 42/47/55LV3700
42/47/55LV5400
42/47/55LV5500
55LV9500
42/47/55LW5600
42/47/
55LW5700
47/55
LW6500
47/55LW9800
55LK530
65LW6500
VESA 400 x 400 600 x 400
Standard screw M6 M8
Number of
screws
4 4
Wall mount
bracket
(optional)
LSW400B,
LSW400BG,
DSW400BG
LSW600B
CAUTION
Disconnect the power first, and then move
or install the TV. Otherwise electric shock
may occur.
If you install the TV on a ceiling or slanted
wall, it may fall and result in severe injury.
Use an authorized LG wall mount bracket
and contact the local dealer or qualified
personnel.
Do not over tighten the screws as this may
cause damage to the TV and void your
warranty.
Use the screws and wall mount bracket
that meet the VESA standard. Any damages
or injuries by misuse or using an improper
accessory are not covered by the warranty.
NOTE
Use the screws that are listed on the VESA
standard screw specifications.
The wall mount kit includes an installation
manual and necessary parts.
The wall mount bracket is optional. You can
obtain additional accessories from your local
dealer.
The length of screws may differ depending
on the wall mount. Make sure to use the
proper length.
For more information, refer to the manual
supplied with the wall mount bracket.
Mounting on a wall
Attach an optional wall mount bracket at the rear
of the TV carefully and install the wall mount
bracket on a solid wall perpendicular to the
floor. When you attach the TV to other building
materials, please contact qualified personnel.
LG recommends that wall mounting be performed
by a qualified professional installer.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
(4 inch)
Make sure to use screws and wall mount
bracket that meet the VESA standard. Standard
dimensions for the wall mount kits are described
in the following table.
Model 50PZ750
50PZ950
50PZ950U
60PZ750
60PZ950
60PZ950U
VESA 400 x 400 600 x 400
Standard screw M6 M8
Number of screws 4 4
Wall mount bracket
(optional)
PSW400B,
PSW400BG,
DSW400BG
PSW600B,
PSW600BG
Model 32LW5700 42/47LK550
42/47LK530
VESA 200 x 100 200 x 200
Standard screw M4 M6
Number of screws 4 4
Wall mount bracket
(optional)
LSW100B,
LSW100BG
LSW200B,
LSW200BG
30
ENG
ENGLISH
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
Tidying cables
PZ750, PZ950, PZ950U series
1 Install the power cord holder and power cord.
- It will help prevent the power cable from
being removed by accident.
2 Gather and bind the cables with the cable
holder.
Install the LAN cable as shown to reduce the
electromagnetic wave.
CAUTION
Do not move the TV by holding the cable
holder and power cord holder, as the cable
holders may break, and injuries and damage
to the TV may occur.
LV3700, LV5400, LV5500, LV9500, LW5600,
LW5700, LW6500, LW9800 series
1 Gather and bind the cables with the cable
holder on the TV back cover.
or
LK530, LK550 series
1 Gather and bind the cables with the cable
management clip.
2 Fix the cable management clip firmly to the TV.
AC IN
AC IN
AC IN
31
ENG
ENGLISH
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
Make sure to point the remote control toward the remote control sensor on the TV.
REMOTE CONTROL
The descriptions in this manual are based on the buttons on the remote control.
Please read this manual carefully and use the TV correctly.
To replace batteries, open the battery cover, replace batteries (1.5 V AAA) matching
the and ends to the label inside the compartment, and close the battery cover.
To remove the batteries, perform the installation actions in reverse.
CAUTION
Do not mix old and new batteries, as this may damage the remote control.
ENERGY
CHVOL
1 2 ABC 3 DEF
4 GHI 5 JKL 6
MNO
7
PQRS
8 TUV
0
9
WXYZ
P
A
G
E
SAVING
TV
AV MODE
INPUT
LIGHT
FAV
3D
MUTE
MARK
DELETE
CHAR/NUM
LIST
FLASHBK
RATIO
BACK EXIT
ENTER
3D OPTION
FREEZE
Home
Premium
Q.MENU
SMART TV
INFO
(POWER)
Turns the TV on or off.
LIGHT (Depending on model)
Illuminates the remote control buttons.
ENERGY SAVING (See p.88)
Adjusts the brightness of the screen to reduce energy consumption.
AV MODE (See p.46)
Selects an AV mode.
INPUT (See p.46)
Changes the input source; Turns the TV on.
TV
Returns to the last TV channel.
Alphanumeric buttons
Enters letters and numbers.
LIST (See p.43)
Accesses the saved channel list.
- (Dash)
Inserts a dash between numbers such as 2-1 and 2-2.
FLASHBK
Alternates between the two last channels selected (pressing repeatedly).
32
ENG
ENGLISH
REMOTE CONTROL
ENERGY
CHVOL
1 2 ABC 3 DEF
4 GHI 5 JKL 6
MNO
7
PQRS
8 TUV
0
9
WXYZ
P
A
G
E
SAVING
TV
AV MODE
INPUT
LIGHT
FAV
3D
MUTE
MARK
DELETE
CHAR/NUM
LIST
FLASHBK
RATIO
BACK EXIT
ENTER
3D OPTION
FREEZE
Home
Premium
Q.MENU
SMART TV
INFO
VOL
Adjusts the volume level.
MARK
Selects a menu or option.
FAV (See p.43)
Accesses your favorite channel list.
CHAR/NUM
Switches between Letter and Number input modes.
3D (for 3D TV) (See p.84)
Uses for viewing 3D video.
MUTE
Mutes all sounds.
DELETE
Deletes letters and numbers.
CH
Scrolls through the saved channels.
PAGE
Moves to the previous or next screen.
ENERGY
CHVOL
1 2 ABC 3 DEF
4 GHI 5 JKL 6
MNO
7
PQRS
8 TUV
0
9
WXYZ
P
A
G
E
SAVING
TV
AV MODE
INPUT
LIGHT
FAV
MUTE
MARK
DELETE
CHAR/NUM
LIST
FLASHBK
BACK EXIT
ENTER
Q.MENU
INFO
RATIO
Home
Premium
SMART TV
VOL
Adjusts the volume level.
MARK
Selects a menu or option.
FAV (See p.43)
Accesses your favorite channel list.
CHAR/NUM
Switches between Letter and Number input modes.
RATIO (See p.45)
Resizes an image.
MUTE
Mutes all sounds.
DELETE
Deletes letters and numbers.
CH
Scrolls through the saved channels.
PAGE
Moves to the previous or next screen.
33
ENG
ENGLISH
REMOTE CONTROL
ENERGY
CHVOL
1 2 ABC 3 DEF
4 GHI 5 JKL 6
MNO
7
PQRS
8 TUV
0
9
WXYZ
P
A
G
E
SAVING
TV
AV MODE
INPUT
LIGHT
FAV
3D
MUTE
MARK
DELETE
CHAR/NUM
LIST
FLASHBK
RATIO
BACK EXIT
ENTER
3D OPTION
FREEZE
Home
Premium
Q.MENU
SMART TV
INFO
Premium
Accesses the Premium menus.
Home (See p.41)
Accesses the Home menu.
Q. MENU (See p.47)
Accesses the quick menu.
3D OPTION (for 3D TV)
Used for viewing 3D video.
Navigation buttons (up/down/left/right)
Scrolls through menus or options.
ENTER
Selects menus or options and confirms your input.
BACK
Returns to the previous level.
INFO
Views the information of the current program and screen.
EXIT
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV viewing.
34
ENG
ENGLISH
REMOTE CONTROL
ENERGY
CHVOL
1 2 ABC 3 DEF
4 GHI 5 JKL 6
MNO
7
PQRS
8 TUV
0
9
WXYZ
P
A
G
E
SAVING
TV
AV MODE
INPUT
LIGHT
FAV
MUTE
MARK
DELETE
CHAR/NUM
LIST
FLASHBK
BACK EXIT
ENTER
Q.MENU
INFO
RATIO
Home
Premium
SMART TV
ENERGY
CHVOL
1 2 ABC 3 DEF
4 GHI 5 JKL 6
MNO
7
PQRS
8 TUV
0
9
WXYZ
P
A
G
E
SAVING
TV
AV MODE
INPUT
LIGHT
FAV
3D
MUTE
MARK
DELETE
CHAR/NUM
LIST
FLASHBK
RATIO
BACK EXIT
ENTER
3D OPTION
FREEZE
Home
Premium
Q.MENU
SMART TV
INFO
Color buttons
These access special functions in some menus.
Control buttons
Controls the Premium contents, Smart Share menus, or the SIMPLINK
compatible devices (USB, SIMPLINK).
FREEZE (
Plasma
)
Freezes the current frame (Not supported when using USB Mode and
Simplink).
SIMPLINK (See p.117)
Accesses the AV devices connected to the TV;
Opens the SIMPLINK menu.
RATIO (See p.45)
Resizes an image.
35
ENG
ENGLISH
REMOTE CONTROL
Magic Motion Remote Control Functions
LV3700, LV5400, LW5700, LK530, LK550 series: Supports the Magic Motion remote control, which is sold
separately. Refer to the Magic Motion Remote Control manual for operating instructions.
Please read this manual carefully and use the TV correctly.
When the message “Magic motion remote control battery is low. Change the
battery.” is displayed, replace the battery.
To replace batteries, open the battery cover, replace batteries (1.5 V AA) matching
and ends to the label inside the compartment, and close the battery cover. Be
sure to point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the TV.
To remove the batteries, perform the installation actions in reverse.
CAUTION
Do not mix old and new batteries, as this may damage the remote control.
CH
MUTE
VOL
ENTER
Make sure to point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the TV.
(POWER)
Turns the TV on or off.
MUTE
Mutes all sounds.
ENTER
Selects menus or options and confirms
your input.
Press this button to display the pointer
when it disappears from the screen.
If you press the navigation button while
moving the pointer on the screen,
the pointer disappears, and the Magic
Motion remote control works as a
regular remote control.
To display the pointer again, shake the
Magic Motion remote control from
side to side within 2 minutes after it
disappeared. (If 2 minutes have passed,
press the Enter button to display the
pointer.)
Pointer (RF transmitter)
Blinks the light when operating.
Home
Accesses the Home menu.
Navigation buttons (up/down/left/right)
Scrolls through menus or options.
VOL
Adjusts the volume level.
CH
Scrolls through the saved channels.
For 3D TV
36
ENG
ENGLISH
REMOTE CONTROL
Registering Magic Motion Remote
Control
The Magic Motion Remote Control operates by
pairing with your TV.
Register the Magic Motion Remote Control to use
it.
How to register the Magic Motion Remote
Control
To register the remote control, press the ENTER
button on the remote control while aiming it at
your TV.
How to Re-register the Magic Motion Remote
Control after Registration Failure
Reset the remote control by pressing and holding
both the ENTER and MUTE buttons for 5 seconds.
(Once the reset is complete, the light on the
Pointer blinks.) Then repeat the above procedure
to register the remote control.
How to use Magic Motion Remote
Control
1 Press ENTER button if there is no pointer on
your TV screen. The pointer will then appear on
the screen.
If the pointer has not been used for a certain
period of time, it will disappear.
2 You can move the pointer by aiming the
Pointer Receiver of the remote control at your
TV then move it left, right, up or down.
If the pointer does not work properly after
clicking the ENTER button, leave the remote
control for 10 seconds then use it again.
Precautions to Take when Using
the Magic Motion Remote Control
Use the remote control within the maximum
communication distance (10 m, 32.8ft).
Using the remote control beyond this
distance, or with an object obstructing it,
may cause a communication failure.
A communication failure may occur due to
nearby devices. Electrical devices such as
a microwave oven or wireless LAN product
may cause interference, as this will use the
same bandwidth (2.4 GHz) as the Magic
Motion Remote Control.
The Magic Motion Remote Control may be
damaged or may malfunction if it is dropped
or receives a heavy impact.
When playing a game using the Magic
Motion Remote Control, hold it securely by
wrapping its strap around your wrist and
adjusting the length with the adjustable ring.
Take care not to bump into nearby furniture
or other people when using the Magic
Motion Remote Control.
Manufacturer and installer cannot provide
service related to human safety as the
applicable wireless device has possibility of
electric wave interference.
It is recommended that an Access Point (AP)
be located more than 1 m (3.28 ft) away
from the TV. If the AP is installed closer
than 1 m (3.28 ft), the magic motion remote
control may not perform as expected due to
frequency interference.
37
ENG
ENGLISH
REMOTE CONTROL
WATCHING TV
Connecting to an antenna or
cable
Connect an antenna, cable, or cable box to watch
TV while referring to the following. The illustrations
may differ from the actual items and a RF cable is
optional.
Connecting an antenna or basic
cable
Connect the TV to a wall antenna socket with an
RF cable (75 Ω).
NOTE
Use a signal splitter to use more than 2 TVs.
Visit
http://lgknowledgebase.com
for more
information about the antenna and cable
connection. Search for antenna.
Connecting a cable box
Connect the TV to a cable box and the cable box
to a wall antenna socket with 2 RF cables (75 Ω).
CAUTION
Make sure not to bend the copper wire of
the RF cable.
Copper wire
Complete all connections between devices,
and then connect the power cord to the
power outlet to prevent damage to your TV.
38
ENG
ENGLISH
WATCHING TV
Turning the TV on for the first
time
When you turn the TV on for the first time, the
Initial setting screen appears. Select a language
and customize the basic settings.
1 Connect the power cord to a power outlet.
2 In Standby mode, press the power button on
the remote control to turn the TV on.
The Initial setting screen appears if you turn
the TV on for the first time.
NOTE
You can also access Initial Setting by
accessing OPTION in the Home menu -
SETUP.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions to customize
your TV settings according to your preferences.
Language Selects a language to
display.
Mode Setting Selects Home Use for
the home environment.
Power Indicator Sets the standby light.
(For LED LCD TV)
Time Zone Selects the time zone
and daylight saving.
Network Setting Sets your network to
enable network-related
feature on the TV.
(For LV9500, LW9800
series)
Auto Tuning Scans and saves available
channels automatically.
NOTE
To display images in the best quality for
your home environment, select Home
Use.
Store Demo is suitable for the retail
environment.
If you select Store Demo, the any
customized settings will switch back to
the default settings of Store Demo in 5
minutes.
Power Indicator feature is disabled in
Store Demo mode.
4 When the basic settings are complete,
press ENTER.
NOTE
If you do not complete the Initial setting,
it will appear whenever the TV turns on.
Disconnect the power cord from the
power outlet when you do not use the
TV for a long period of time.
5 To turn the TV off, press the power button on
the remote control.
39
ENG
ENGLISH
WATCHING TV
Watching TV
1 In Standby mode, press the power button on
the remote control to turn the TV on.
2 Press INPUT and select TV.
3 Control the TV using the following buttons
while you are watching TV.
Button Description
CH (^, v) Scrolls through saved channels.
LIST Selects a channel on the saved or
recent watched channel list.
0 - 9 Selects a channel by entering
numbers.
VOL (+, -) Adjusts the volume level.
MUTE Mutes all sounds.
AV MODE1Selects an AV mode (See p.46).
Q.MENU Accesses the quick menus (See p.47).
FLASHBK Alternates between the last two
channels selected.
RATIO Resizes an image (See p.45).
FREEZE
(
Plasma
)
Freezes the current frame while you
are watching TV
1 Each AV mode has the optimized image and
sound settings. If you select Off, the image
and sound settings will be restored to the
previously customized settings.
4 To turn the TV off, press the power button on
the remote control.
The TV switches to Standby mode.
40
ENG
ENGLISH
WATCHING TV
Accessing Home Menu
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to one of the following menus and press ENTER.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the setting or option you want and press ENTER.
4 When you are finished, press EXIT.
Option Description
1Current Date, Time
2Channel program info
3Function card: You can enjoy various content files by selecting
each card and you can edit the premium card by selecting 5 items.
4Function card position
5Sign In
6Exit
7Current watching channel screen
8INPUT, SETUP, FAVORITE menu.
9Launcher bar
1
7
8
9
4 5 62 3
41
ENG
ENGLISH
WATCHING TV
Managing channels
* The Digital broadcasting (DTV, Cable DTV) is not
available for Philippines.
Setting up channels
Storing channels
To store channels automatically,
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press ENTER.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
CHANNEL and press ENTER.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Auto
Tuning and press ENTER.
5 Select Start to start automatic tuning.
The TV scans and saves available channels
automatically.
6 When you are finished, press EXIT.
When you return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
To store channels manually,
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press ENTER.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll
CHANNEL and press ENTER.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
Manual Tuning and press ENTER.
5 Scroll through the channel types, and then add
or delete channels.
6 When you are finished, press EXIT.
When you return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
NOTE
If the TV scans a blocked channel, you will
be prompted to enter your password to keep
the channel scanned.
You can store up to 1000 channels. The
number of channels that you can store
differs depending on the broadcasting signal
environment.
The channels are stored in the order of DTV,
TV, Cable DTV and Cable TV.
Editing your channel list
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press ENTER.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
CHANNEL and press ENTER.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
Channel Edit and press ENTER.
5 Edit channels using the following buttons.
Button Description
^
Highlight the channel type (DTV, TV,
Cable DTV, Cable TV).
^
,
v
,
<
,
>
Scrolls through channel types or
channels.
ENTER Edits channels.
Watch Selects the highlighted
channel to view.
Set as
Favorite
Registers or cancels
the current channel in
favorite channel list.
Add/
Delete
Adds or deletes a
channel.
The deleted channel
displays in blue.
Block Blocks or unblocks a
channel.
CH (
^
,
v
)Moves to the previous or next page.
Red button Selects your desired favorite channel
group.
6 When you are finished, press EXIT.
When you return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
42
ENG
ENGLISH
WATCHING TV
Selecting a channel on the channel list
1 Press LIST to access the channel list.
DTV
DTV
Button Description
<
,
>
Selects Channel list or Recent
channel list.
^
,
v
Scrolls through channel.
ENTER Selects the highlighted channel to
view.
CH (
^
,
v
)Moves to the previous or next
page.
Red button Edits Channel.
FAV Moves to the favorite channel list.
2 When you are finished, press EXIT.
When you return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
NOTE
If you select the blocked channel, you will be
prompted to enter your password.
Using favorite channels
Add the channels that you watch frequently to the
favorite list.
1 Select a channel to add to the favorite list.
2 Press FAV.
DTV
Button Description
<
,
>
Selects a desired favorite channel
group.
CH (^, v) Moves to the previous or next
page
Red button Moves to the Channel Edit.
Green
button
Registers or cancels the current
channel.
FAV Moves to the Channel List.
3 When you are finished, press EXIT.
43
ENG
ENGLISH
WATCHING TV
Checking current program info
Press INFO to view the information of the currently program while you are watching.
The following information appears at the bottom of the screen.
Channel information Program title Current time
End time
Start time
Progress bar
Icon Description
Multilingual The program contains two or more audio language services. You can change the
audio language using the quick menu.
Dolby Digital The program contains a Dolby Digital audio signal in TV and HDMI input sources.
Dolby Digital
Plus
The program contains a Dolby Digital Plus audio signal in TV and HDMI input
sources.
Caption The program contains one or more language caption services. You can select a
closed caption you want by using the quick menu.
Aspect ratio
The original aspect ratio of the video is 4:3.
The original aspect ratio of the video is 16:9 (wide).
Resolution
The video resolution is 720 x 480i.
The video resolution is 720 x 480p.
The video resolution is 1280 x 720p.
The video resolution is 1920 x 1080i.
The video resolution is 1920 x 1080p.
V-Chip The program contains Lock information.
Refer to the “TV Rating-General” (See p.97)
44
ENG
ENGLISH
WATCHING TV
Using additional options
Adjusting aspect ratio
Resize an image to view at its optimal size by
pressing RATIO while you are watching TV.
NOTE
You can also change the image size by
pressing Q. MENU or accessing Aspect
Ratio in the PICTURE menu.
The available ratio varies depending on the
input source.
- The input sources: HDMI-PC and RGB-PC
support 4:3 and 16:9.
- The input sources: HDMI-PC 1920 X 1080
supports all of the aspect ratios.
- 16:9: Resizes images to fit the screen width.
- Just Scan: Displays video images in the original
size without cutting off the edges.
NOTE
If you select Just Scan, you may see
image noises at the edge or edges of the
screen.
The input sources: DTV, CADTV,
Component, HDMI-DTV, and DVI-DTV
(720p/1080i/1080p) support Just Scan.
- Set By Program: Displays images in the same
aspect ratio as the original image.
- 4:3: Resizes images to the previous standard.
- Cinema Zoom: Formats an image to the
cinemascope ratio, 2.35:1.
To change the ratio of the cinema zoom,
press
<
or
>
and its range is from 1 to 16.
To move the zoom focus up or down,
press
^
or
v
.
NOTE
If you enlarge or reduce an image, the
image may be distorted.
45
ENG
ENGLISH
WATCHING TV
Changing AV modes
Each AV mode has optimized image and sound
settings.
Press AV MODE repeatedly to select an
appropriate mode.
Mode Description
Off Changes to the previously customized
settings
Cinema or
THX Cinema
Use the optimized image and sound
settings for the cinematic look
Sport
(
Plasma
)
Use the optimized image and sound
settings for dynamic action sports.
Game Use the optimized image and sound
settings for fast gaming.
When playing a video game using
PlayStation or Xbox, it is recommended
to use the Game mode.
When in Game mode, functions related
to picture quality will be optimized for
playing games.
Using the input list
Selecting an input source
1 Press INPUT to access the input sources.
- The connected device displays on each input
source.
NOTE
You can also access the input source list
by selecting INPUT in the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to one of
the input sources and press ENTER.
Input source Description
TV Watch TV over the air, cable, and
digital cable broadcast.
Input source Description
USB Play media files from a thumb
drive.
NETWORK Play media files from your home
network.
AV Watch video from a VCR or other
external devices.
Component Watch video from a DVD or other
external devices, or through a
digital set-top box.
RGB-PC Use the TV as a computer monitor.
HDMI Watch video from a HTS or other
high definition devices.
The disconnected input sources will be gray.
- To add an input label, press the Green button.
You can easily identify a device connected to
each input source.
- If you connect a new external device to the
TV, a pop-up window appears. Select Yes on
the pop-up window to select an input source.
- To access the SIMPLINK, press the Red
button. If you select “SIMPLINK and On”,
the pop-up window for the HDMI input will
not display.
46
ENG
ENGLISH
WATCHING TV
Adding an Input label
Add a label to an input source so that you can
easily identify a device connected to each input
source.
1 Press INPUT to access the input sources.
2 Press the Green button.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to one of
the input sources.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to one of
the input labels.
5 When you are finished, press EXIT.
When you return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
Using the quick menu
Customize frequently used menus.
1 Press Q. MENU to access the quick menus.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll through
the following menus and press ENTER.
Menu Description
Aspect Ratio Changes the image size.
Picture
Mode
Changes the image mode.
Sound Mode Changes the sound mode.
Sleep Timer Sets the length of time until the TV
to turns off.
Caption Activates or deactivate the subtitles
Multi Audio Changes the audio language (Digital
signal)
SAP Changes the MTS sound (Analog
signal)
Energy
Saving
Reduces the power consumption by
adjusting the screen brightness.
AV Mode Sets the optimized image and sound
settings.
Del/Add Edits the channels to add or delete
the channel.
USB Device Eject a USB device.
The menu is displayed only when
the USB device is connected.
NOTE
The available menus and options may
differ from the input source or product
model that you are using.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
option you want.
4 When you are finished, press Q. MENU.
47
ENG
ENGLISH
WATCHING TV
ENTERTAINMENT
Network Connection
Connecting to a wired network
Connect the TV to a local area network (LAN) via
the LAN port as shown in the following illustration
and set up the network settings.
If wired and wireless networks are both available,
wired is the preferred method.
After making a physical connection, a small
number of home networks may require the TV
network settings to be adjusted. For most home
networks, the TV will connect to automatically
without any adjustments.
For detail information, contact your internet
provider or router manual.
W
IRELE
SS
CO
NTR
O
L
R
S
-232
C
IN
(CO
NTR
O
L
&S
ERVI
C
E
)
CO
MP
O
NENT
IN1
VIDEO
AU
DI
O
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
A
UDI
O
V
IDE
O
L
/MON
O
R
A
V IN
1
ꔡ
LAN
RGB IN (PC
)
OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO
OUT
PTICAL
DIGIT
TICAL DIGIT
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE
IN
ANTENNA
ANTENNA
A
V IN 2
AU
DI
O
/
VIDE
O
CO
MP
O
NENT IN
2
AU
DI
O
/
Y P
B
P
R
H
/
P
IN 1
(
AR
C)
/
DV
I
I
N
2
/
DVI
I
N 3
/
DVI
IN
4
/
DVI
US
B IN
1
US
B IN
2
Router
LAN WAN
Cable modem
ETHERNET
@
Internet
LAN
CAUTION
Do not connect a modular phone cable to the
LAN port.
Since there are various connection methods,
please follow the specifications of your
telecommunication carrier or internet service
provider.
After connecting the LAN port, use the
Premium or LG Apps menu.
To set up the network settings: (Even if your TV
has already connected automatically, running
setup again will not harm anything)
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press ENTER.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
NETWORK and press ENTER.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to select
Network Setting and press ENTER.
5 If wired and wireless are simultaneously
connected, press the Navigation buttons to
select Wired and press ENTER.
6 If you have already set the Network Setting,
select Resetting. The new connection settings
will reset the current network settings.
7 Select IP Auto Setting or IP Manual Setting.
- If selecting IP Manual Setting, press the
Navigation and Number buttons. IP addresses
will need to be input manually.
- IP Auto Setting: Select this if there is a DHCP
server (Router) on the local area network
(LAN) via wired connection, the TV will
automatically be allocated an IP address. If
you’re using a broadband router or broadband
modem that has a DHCP (Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol) server function. The
IP address will automatically be determined.
- IP Manual Setting: Select if there is no DHCP
server on the network or you want to set the
IP address manually.
8 When you are finished, press EXIT.
48
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
Connecting to a wireless network
The LG Wireless LAN for Broadband/DLNA
Adaptor, which is sold separately, allows the TV to
connect to a wireless LAN network.
The network configuration and connection method
may vary depending on the equipment in use
and the network environment. Refer to the setup
instructions supplied with your access point or
wireless router for detailed connection steps and
network settings.
Setting up the AP (Access Point) or the wireless
router is required before connecting the TV to the
network. The easiest method is the WPS button
method (Third method in this section).
(LV9500, LW9800 series: Built-in the Wi-Fi Module,
Unnecessary Wireless LAN for Broadband/DLNA
adaptor setup)
W
IRELE
SS
CO
NTR
O
L
RS-232C IN (CONTROL&SERVICE
)
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
IN1
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
A
UDI
O
V
IDE
O
L
/MON
O
R
AV IN1
ꔡ
I
N 1
(
AR
C)
/
DVI
I
N
2
/
DVI
I
N 3
/
DVI
IN
4
/
DVI
LAN
R
GB IN (PC)
OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO
OUT
PTICAL
DIGIT
TICAL DIGIT
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
AUDIO
INAUDIO IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE
IN
ANTENNA
ANTENNA
A
V IN 2
AUDIO / VIDEO
CO
MP
O
NENT IN 2
AU
DI
O
/
Y
P
B
P
R
H/P
H
DD I
N
US
B IN
1
USB A
pps
US
B IN 2
Router
LAN WAN
Cable modem
ETHERNET
@
Internet
HDD IN
USB IN 1 USB Apps
USB IN 2
NOTE
For enjoying pictures, music, or video stored
on a PC using the router, a wired connection
is recommended.
When the wireless port of the router is used,
there may be restrictions on some functions.
It is recommended that an Access Point (AP)
be located more than 1 m (3.28 ft) away
from the TV. If the AP is installed closer than
1 m, the magic motion remote control may
not perform as expected due to frequency
interference.
NOTE
If you want to access the Internet directly on
your TV, the broadband internet connection
should always be on.
If you cannot access the Internet, check
the network conditions from a PC on your
network.
When you use Network Setting, check the
LAN cable or check if DHCP in the router is
turned on.
If you do not complete the network settings,
the network may not work properly.
49
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
To set up the network settings,
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press ENTER.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
NETWORK and press ENTER.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to select
Network Setting and press ENTER.
5 Press the Navigation buttons to select
Wireless and press ENTER.
6 If you already set Network Setting, select
Resetting and press ENTER.
The new connection settings resets the
current network settings.
7 Press the Navigation buttons to select Setting
from the AP list and press ENTER.
- Scan the all available AP (Access Point) or
wireless routers within range and display
them as a list.
8 Press the Navigation buttons to select an AP
(Access Point) or wireless router on the list. (If
your AP is secured, you will prompted for the
key.) And press ENTER.
9 Press the Number buttons to Input the security
key of AP and press ENTER.
When a security code is already
set
PIN (Personal Identification Number)
If your router is set to use a PIN, use the following
instructions.
1 Repeat step 1-7 on “Connecting to a wireless
network”.
2 Press the Red button to connect the access
point with PIN mode.
3 You can see the Network ID and Security Key
on your TV screen.
Enter the PIN number to your device.
PIN number is the unique 8 digit number of the
dongle.
4 Press ENTER to select Connect.
5 Repeat step 6-7 on “Connecting to a wired
network”.
50
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
If your router or AP has a WPS button, it is the
easiest connection method. You simply press the
button on the router and then select the WPS on
the TV within 120 seconds.
1 Repeat step 1-7 on “Connecting to a wireless
network”.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to select the
Simple setting (WPS-button mode).
3 Press the WPS button on your router.
4 Go back to the TV and select Connect.
5 Repeat step 6-7 on “Connecting to a wired
network”.
Ad-hoc Mode
Ad-hoc mode allows the TV to use a wireless to
connect to a computer without using a router or
access point.
1 Repeat step 1-5 on “Connecting to a wireless
network”.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to select Setting
Ad-hoc network and press ENTER.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to select Enter
and press ENTER.
4 Press ENTER to select Connect to connect Ad-
hoc network.
- You can see the Network ID and Security Key
on your TV screen.
- Enter this Network ID and Security Key to
your device.
- When needed, you can change the setting
information using the Red button.
NOTE
When searching for wireless networks on
your PC using ad-hoc, the TV is named
LGTV10.
LGTV10 that appears in the list. (Select
the same name as the network ID that
appears on your TV screen.)
5 Press the Navigation buttons to type in an IP
address and press ENTER.
Option Description
PC Setting
Internet Protocol(TCP/IP) of
PC needs to be set manually.
IP address, Subnet Mask, and
default Gateway can be set with
your own discretion.
» e.g.) IP address:
192.168.0.1 / Subnet Mask:
255.255.255.0 / default
Gateway: 192.168.0.10
TV Setting
Verify IP address and gateway of
PC. Input Gateway address of PC
to IP Address, and IP Address of
PC to Gateway, and select Enter.
» e.g.) IP address:
192.168.0.10 / Subnet Mask:
255.255.255.0 / default
Gateway: 192.168.0.1
6 Press the Navigation buttons to select Close
after Network setting is completed.
7 Press the ENTER.
51
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
Tips for Network setting
Use a standard LAN cable with this TV. Cat5 or
better with a RJ45 connector.
Many network connection problems during set
up can often be fixed by re-setting the router or
modem. After connecting the player to the home
network, quickly power off and/or disconnect
the power cable of the home network router or
cable modem. Then power on and/or connect
the power cable again.
Depending on the internet service provider (ISP),
the number of devices that can receive internet
service may be limited by the applicable terms
of service. For details, contact your ISP.
LG is not responsible for any malfunction of the
TV and/or the internet connection feature due to
communication errors/malfunctions associated
with your broadband internet connection, or
other connected equipment.
LG is not responsible for problems within your
internet connection.
Some content available through the network
connection may not be compatible with the
TV. If you have questions about such content,
please contact the producer of the content.
You may experience undesired results if the
network connection speed does not meet the
requirements of the content being accessed.
Some internet connection operations may not
be possible due to certain restrictions set by the
Internet service provider (ISP) supplying your
broadband Internet connection.
Any fees charged by an ISP including, without
limitation, connection charges are your
responsibility.
A 10 Base-T or 100 Base-TX LAN port is required
when using a wired connection to this TV. If
your internet service does not allow for such a
connection, you will not be able to connect the
TV.
A DSL modem is required to use DSL service
and a cable modem is required to use cable
modem service. Depending on the access
method of and subscriber agreement with your
ISP, you may not be able to use the internet
connection feature contained in this TV or you
may be limited to the number of devices you
can connect at the same time. (If your ISP limits
sub-scription to one device, this TV may not
be allowed to connect when a PC is already
connected.)
The use of a “Router” may not be allowed or its
usage may be limited depending on the policies
and restrictions of your ISP. For details, contact
your ISP directly.
The wireless network operates at 2.4 GHz
radio frequencies that are also used by other
household devices such as cordless telephone,
Bluetooth® devices, microwave oven, and can
be affected by interference from them.It can
be interrupted by the device using 5 Ghz radio
frequencies. It is same device with LG wireless
media box, cordless telephone, other Wi-Fi
device.
It may decrease the service speed using
Wireless network by surrounding wireless
condition.
Turn off all unused network equipment in
your local home network. Some devices may
generate network traffic.
In some instances, placing the access point or
wireless router higher up away from the floor
may improve the reception.
The reception quality over wireless depends on
many factors such as type of the access point,
distance between the TV and access point, and
the location of the TV.
To connect wireless AP, an AP that supports
the wireless connection is necessary, and the
wireless connection function of the AP needs to
be activated. Please enquire to the AP supplier
for the possibility of AP wireless connections.
Please verify the security settings of AP SSID
for wireless AP connection, and enquire to the
AP supplier for the AP SSID security settings.
The TV can become slower or malfunction
with wrong settings of network equipments
(wired/wireless router, hub, etc). Please install
correctly by referring to the manual of the
equipment, and set the network.
When AP is set to include 802.11 n, and if
Encryption is designated as WEP(64/128bit) or
WPA(TKIP/AES), the connection may not be
possible. There may be different connection
methods according to the AP manufacturers.
52
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
Network Status
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press ENTER.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
NETWORK and press ENTER.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to select
Network Status.
5 Press ENTER to check the network status.
Option Description
Setting
Return to the network setting
menu or wireless network setting
type menu.
Test Test the current network status
after setting the network.
Close Return to the previous menu.
53
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
Premium Account Function
LG’s Premium technology allows you to access
a variety of online services or content directly
on your TV. Your TV offers instant streaming
of movies, weather, videos, and photo album
services with a Premium account and an Internet
connection.
Enjoy entertainment including not only
entertainment content, but also up-to-the minute
news, weather updates, photo management, and
more by simply using the TV’s remote control
without a separate PC.
1 Press Premium to access the Premium option.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
content you want and press ENTER.
21 3 4
5
6
Option Description
1Moves to the weather setting screen.
2Sign into the premium service.
3Moves to the previous menu screen.
4Returns to TV viewing.
5
Selects your desired online service.
If a service requires you to log in, you
must first sign up for the service on
your computer and then log into the
service on the TV.
6Launcher bar
3 Enjoy the premium features.
Notice
These services are provided by separate
content providers.
Please visit the content providers web site
for specific information on their service.
Premium menu can differ by country.
Note that content may be updated
automatically depending on the service
provider, so the content layout or operation
method may change without notice. Please
refer to the help menu on the screen.
All information, data, documents,
communications, downloads, files, text,
images, photographs, graphics, videos,
webcasts, publications, tools, resources,
software, code, programs, applets, widgets,
applications, products and other content
(“Content”) and all services and offerings
(“Services”) provided or made available by
or through any third party (each a “Service
Provider”) is the sole responsibility of the
Service Provider from whom it originated.
The availability of and access to Content and
Services furnished by the Service Provider
through the LGE Device are subject to
change at any time, without prior notice,
including, but not limited to the suspension,
removal or cessation of all or any part of the
Content or Services.
Should you have any inquiry or problem
related to the Content or Services, you may
refer to the Service Provider’s website for
the most up-to-date information. LGE is
neither responsible nor liable for customer
service related to the Content and Services.
Any question or request for service relating
to the Content or Services should be made
directly to the respective Content and
Service Providers.
Please note that LGE is not responsible for
any Content or Services provided by the
Service Provider or any changes to, removal
of, or cessation of such Content or Services
and does not warrant or guaranty the
availability of or access to such Content or
Services.
54
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
Some content may be harmful to minors
depending on the service provider. Parental
guidance is necessary.
The service may be interrupted if the
Internet connection is unstable. Please check
the connection status if you experience this
problem.
The videos list searched from the TV may
different with the list searched from a web
browser on PC.
The playback of videos may pause, stop, or
buffer depending on your broadband speed.
For service that requires log in, join the
applicable service on the website using a PC
and log in through the TV to enjoy various
additional functions.
For Plasma TV: If there is no user action 2
minutes following freezing image or video
on screen, the screensaver will activate
itself preventing a fixed image remaining on
screen.
Legal Notice
IMPORTANT NOTICE RELATING TO NETWORK
SERVICE
All content and services accessible through this
device belong to third parties and are protected
by copyright, patent, trademark and/or other
intellectual property laws. Such content and
services are provided solely for your personal
noncommercial use. You may not use any
content or services in a manner that has not
been authorized by the content owner or service
provider. Without limiting the foregoing, unless
expressly authorized by the applicable content
owner or service provider, you may not copy,
upload, post, transmit, translate, sell, modify,
create derivative works, or distribute in any
manner or medium any content or services
displayed through this device.
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE
THAT THE DEVICE AND ALL THIRD PARTY
CONTENT AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED "AS
IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. LG ELECTRONICS
EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND
CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO ANY CONTENT
AND SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS OR, IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD
PARTY RIGHTS. LG DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE
ACCURACY, VALIDITY, TIMELINESS, LEGALITY,
OR COMPLETENESS OF ANY CONTENT OR
SERVICE MADE AVAILABLE THROUGH THIS
DEVICE AND DOES NOT WARRANT THAT
THE DEVICE OR SERVICES WILL MEET YOUR
REQUIREMENTS, OR THAT OPERATION
OF THE DEVICE OR SERVICES WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE. UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE,
SHALL LG BE LIABLE, WHETHER IN CONTRACT
OR TORT, FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF, ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN,
OR ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE ACCESSED BY
YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY, EVEN IF ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Third party services may be changed, suspended,
removed, terminated or interrupted, or access
may be disabled at any time, without notice,
and LG makes no representation or warranty
that any content or service will remain available
for any period of time. Content and services
are transmitted by third parties by means of
networks and transmission facilities over which
LG has no control. LG may impose limits on the
use of or access to certain services or content,
in any case and without notice or liability. LG
expressly disclaims any responsibility or liability
for any change, interruption, disabling, removal
of or suspension of any content or service made
available through this device.
LG is neither responsible nor liable for customer
service related to the content and services. Any
question or request for service relating to the
content or services should be made directly to the
respective content and service providers.
55
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
LG Apps function
This feature is not available for all country.
Additional applications can be downloaded from
the LG App Store.
These functions may be not available for a certain
period of time depending on country or product
model. In such cases, the buttons may be
disabled.
They are enabled when the services are available.
1 2
3
4
6 7 8 95 3
Option Description
1Sign In,
Sign out
Sign in or sign out to the
premium service.
2Exit Returns to TV viewing.
3LG Apps Moves to the LG Apps.
4Moves to the LG Apps you
want directly.
5Search These functions may be not
available for a certain period of
time depending on country or
product model. In such cases,
the buttons may be disabled.
They are enabled when the
services are available.
6Web Browser
7Media Link
8Quick Apps. Stores the most frequently
used apps among all
downloads. To change the list
of Quick Apps, see “Using
My Apps”.
9My Apps. Moves to My Apps.
You can browse all apps
installed, change the list of
Quick Apps, and select and
play the app you want.
Registration LG Apps
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press Red button to register.
- You can only register as a free member from
your TV.
3 Create your ID and password.
Press the Navigation buttons to select alphabet
and number and select OK.
4 The registration is completed.
NOTE
If you wish to become a paid member or
change your information, please use your PC
and visit
http://www.lgappstv.com
.
56
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
Sign in with LG Apps account
To enjoy the LG Apps with your account, you need
sign in with the LG Apps account.
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press Red button to sign in.
It displays the keyboard menu for entering ID
and password.
- If you are not a member, press Red button
again. You can only register as a free member
from your TV.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
alphabet or number and press ENTER.
- If you check “Auto Sign In”, you are
automatically logged in whenever you turn on
TV.
4 Enjoy the LG Apps.
You can enjoy Premium service, LG Apps, My
Apps and much more.
NOTE
You can download a paid app on up to five
TVs.
ID Management
1 After sign in, press Red button again.
A pop-up window will appear.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
desired menu option and press ENTER.
3 Manage the ID by using following menu.
Option Description
Account
Setting
Checks basic information, apps
you purchased and apps installed
on your TV.
Change User Changes your account.
Sign Out Sign out the premium service.
57
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
Using LG Apps
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Sign in on your TV.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
LG Apps and press ENTER.
4 Edit the Apps by using following menu.
1 2 3 4 5
7
86
Option Description
1Sign in/out Sign in or out to use the LG
Apps.
2Search Search the LG Apps.
3My Apps. Move to My Apps.
4Back Move to the previous screen.
5Exit Exit the LG Apps.
6Apps Sorting Hot: Most downloaded
apps in the past 7 days
New: Most recently
released apps
Top Paid: Most downloaded
paid apps
Top Free: Most downloaded
free apps
All: Alphabetical order
Moves to the previous or
next page using CH (^, v)
button.
7Apps Category Shows the LG Apps category
(All, Game, Entertainment,
Life, Education, News/Info.)
8Live TV Watches the current channel.
Purchasing and Installing Apps.
Log in first to purchase apps.
1 Press the Navigation buttons to select Apps
you want and press ENTER.
You can see the information of the App.
2 Press Purchase to buy a App.
5
6
74
1 2 3
8
Option Description
1Sign in/out Sign in or out to use the LG
Apps.
2My Apps. Move to My Apps.
3Back Move to the previous screen.
4App
description
Shows the description of the
current Apps.
5Fee Shows the fee of the current
app.
6Install Install or purchase the App.
You can purchase an app on
either your PC or TV, but it
can be installed and played
only on the TV.
If you want to purchase a
paid app, you need to sign
up as a paid member on
www.lgappstv.com.
If the available space of
your TV is not enough, you
can download apps in the
USB storage device by
connecting it to the USB IN
2 port.
You can play, delete or
move the apps stored in
the USB storage device on
the My Apps screen.
7Rate this App Rate the app you purchased
with stars.
8App info. Shows the creator/program
version/update date/volume/
rating of the current Apps.
NOTE
To store apps in the USB storage device,
make sure that it is connected to the USB IN
2/USB Apps port.
Up to 1000 apps can be stored as USB apps.
The USB storage device containing apps
cannot be used for storing other types of
data.
58
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
Using My Apps
1 Enter the LG Apps after sign in.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to My
Apps. and press ENTER.
4 6 7 8
1
3
2
9
-
5
Option Description
1Shows the amount of used and
available memories.
2Current page number/total number of
pages of My Apps.
3Shows the downloaded apps.
Moves to the previous or next page
using CH (^, v) button.
4Moves the LG Apps.
5Quick Apps.
6Sign In the LG Apps.
After sign in, manage the ID option
(Account Setting, Change User, Sign
Out).
7Edit the My Apps.
8Exit the My Apps.
9Move to the Home menu.
-Delete the Apps.
59
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
Search
(This feature is not available for all country.)
The search option supports LG apps and PLEX
content. It will also work with some premium
services that provide metadata.
1 Connect to the network.
2 Press Home to access the Home menu.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
Search and press ENTER.
4 Use the on-screen keyboard to type in your
desired search term and press .
1
2
3 4 5
7
6
Option Description
1Input the word you would like to search
here.
2Show words similar to the input words.
Select one of the similar words to enter
it in the input field and search for it.
3Clear the search term.
4Move to the previous screen.
5Exit the search.
6On-screen keyboard.
7Start the search after inputting the
search term.
5 Press the Navigation buttons to select the
desired searched results.
1
3 4
2
Option Description
1Show the searched results.
This option is available only for LG
apps, PLEX content and some premium
services.
2Shows detailed information on the
selected search result.
3Move to the previous screen.
4Exit the Search.
60
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
Web Browser Function
(This feature is not available for all country.)
The Web Browser allows you to view Web pages
on your TV.
More information about the Web Browser
The web browser on this device supports Flash
8 and earlier.
The web browser on this device does not
support platform-dependent technologies such
as ActiveX.
The web browser on this device only supports
preinstalled plug-ins.
The web browser on this device may not
support media formats other than the following:
JPEG / PNG / GIF / WMV (ASF) / WMA / MP3 /
MP4
Some Web pages may exceed the memory
allotment of the Web Browser. The Web
Browser will close when this happens.
The web browser on this device uses a single
built-in font. Some text may not be displayed as
intended.
The web browser on this device does not
support downloading of files or fonts.
The web browser on this device is a TV browser.
It may work differently to PC browsers.
Using Web Browser
1 Connect to the network.
2 Press Home to access the Home menu.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
Web Browser and press ENTER.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
URL and press ENTER.
5 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
desired the URL and press ENTER.
6 You can browse websites on your TV.
1 2 4 5 6 73
Select the browser input window to display the
keyboard at the bottom of the screen.
Option Description
1Move to the previous screen.
2Move to the Favorites screen.
3Zoom the screen in or out.
4Add the current web page to Favorites.
5Move to the search screen.
6Move to the previous/next page in the list
of recently viewed web pages.
You can change the URL address to move
to other websites.
You can delete the list and cookies of
recently viewed web pages.
7Exit the web browser.
61
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
Browsing Favorite Websites
1 Connect to the network.
2 Press Home to access the Home menu.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
Web Browser and press ENTER.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
Favorites and press ENTER.
- By adding frequently visited websites to
Favorites, you can browse them easily.
1 2 3
5 6 7
4
Option Description
1Browse a website by directly entering
the URL address.
2Select a website in Favorites.
3View the list of recently viewed web
pages.
4Select a site to browse.
5Edit Favorites.
Move: Change the order in Favorites.
Rename: Rename the sites added to
Favorites.
Delete: Remove the sites from
Favorites.
6Move to the previous screen.
7Exit the web browser.
Browsing Websites by Directly
Entering Address
1 Connect to the network.
2 Press Home to access the Home menu.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
Web Browser and press ENTER.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
URL and press ENTER.
- You can browse a website by directly
entering the URL address.
1 2 3
4
6
5
e
r
7
8 9 -
w
q
Option Description
1Browse a website by directly entering
the URL address.
2Select a website in Favorites.
3View the list of recently viewed web
pages.
4Enter the URL address. If the address
entered is similar to any of the sites
previously visited, a drop-down list will
be displayed.
5Use the keyboard to enter the address.
Select characters to enter.
6Select the keyboard language.
7Change the keyboard.
8Clear the similar addresses appearing
below the address input field.
9Move to the previous page.
-Exit the web browser.
qHide the keyboard. Select the address
input field to display the keyboard again.
wMove the cursor left or right.
eDelete the text before the cursor, one
character at a time.
rPress this after entering the address to
go to the website.
62
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
Viewing Visited Website List
1 Connect to the network.
2 Press Home to access the Home menu.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
Web Browser and press ENTER.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
history and press ENTER.
- You can view the addresses of the websites
you visited previously. Select an item to
move to the page.
1 2 3
4
5 6 7
Option Description
1Browse a website by directly entering
the URL address.
2Select a website in Favorites.
3View the list of recently viewed web
pages.
4Display a list of recently visited pages.
Select an item to move to the page.
5Clear the visited website list.
6Move to the previous screen.
7Exit the web browser.
63
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
Smart Share Function
Connecting USB storage devices
Connect USB storage devices such as a USB
flash drive or external hard drive to the TV and use
multimedia features (See “Browsing files”).
Connect a USB flash drive or USB memory
card reader to the TV as shown in the following
illustration.
W
IRELE
SS
CO
NTR
O
L
RS-232C IN (CONTROL&SERVICE
)
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
IN1
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
AUDIO
VIDE
O
L
/MON
O
R
AV IN1
ꔡ
I
N 1
(
AR
C)
/
DVI
I
N
2
/
DVI
I
N 3
/
DVI
IN
4
/
DVI
LAN
R
GB IN (PC)
OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO
OUT
PTICAL
DIGIT
TICAL DIGIT
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
AUDIO
INAUDIO IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE
IN
ANTENNAANTENNA
A
V IN 2
A
U
DI
O
/
VIDE
O
CO
MP
O
NENT IN 2
AU
DI
O
/
Y
P
B
P
R
H/P
HDD I
N
US
B IN 1
U
SB A
pp
s
US
B IN 2
HDD IN
USB IN 1 USB Apps
USB IN 2
or
To disconnect a USB storage device,
make sure to end the connection properly to
prevent damages to the TV or files.
1 Press Q.MENU to access the quick menus.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to USB
Device and press ENTER.
3 Disconnect the USB storage device only when
the message says that it is safe to remove.
CAUTION
Do not turn the TV off or remove a USB
storage device while the USB storage device
is connected to the TV, as this could result
in loss of files or damage to the USB storage
device.
Back up your files saved on a USB storage
device frequently, as you may lose or
damage the files and this may be not
covered by the warranty.
Tips for using USB storage devices
The TV recognizes only a USB storage
device.
If you connect a USB storage device to the
TV through a USB hub, your TV may not
recognize the USB storage device.
The TV may not recognize a USB storage
device that requires a special driver.
The recognition speed of a USB storage
device may differ depending on the device.
Only use a USB storage device which has
normal music or image files.
Use only USB storage devices that are
formatted as a FAT 32 or NTFS file system.
You may need to connect a USB storage
device to an external power supply with a
power adapter.
If the TV does not recognize a connected
USB storage device, replace the cable and
try again. Do not use an excessively long
cable.
The TV does not support some USB storage
devices properly.
You can use a multi-partition (up to 4) USB
storage device.
You can use up to 4 USB storage devices at
a time by using a USB multi-card reader.
The file alignment method of a USB storage
device is similar to the one of Window XP.
You cannot create or delete a folder saved in
a USB storage device directly on the TV.
The number of characters for a file name is
up to 100 English characters.
Up to 1000 including folders and files can be
recognized.
If there are too many folders and files in one
folder, it may not operate properly.
The recommended capacity for a USB
external hard disk is 1 TB or less and for a
USB storage device is 32 GB or less.
If a USB external hard disk with the Energy
Saving feature does not work, turn the USB
external hard disk off and on again to make
it work properly. For more information, refer
to the user manual of the USB external hard
disk.
USB storage devices below USB 2.0 are
supported as well. But they may not work
properly in the movie list.
The electrostatic can cause USB device’s
malfunction. In this case, USB Device has to
be plugged again.
64
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
Connecting DLNA DMP (Digital
Living Network Alliance, Digital
Media Player)
This TV can display and play many types of movie,
photo and music files from your DLNA server and
has been certified by DLNA.
The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA)
is a cross-industry organization of consumer
electronics, computing industry and mobile device
companies. Digital Living provides consumers with
easy sharing of digital media through a wired or
wireless network in the home.
The DLNA certification logo makes it easy
to find products that comply with the DLNA
Interoperability Guidelines. This unit complies with
DLNA Interoperability Guidelines v1.5. When a
PC running DLNA server software or other DLNA
compatible device is connected to this TV, some
setting changes of software or other devices
may be required. Please refer to the operating
instructions for the software or device for more
information.
Please refer to “Smart Share Function” for
additional information on supported file types and
other instructions.
NOTE
The supplied Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials
CD-ROM is a customized software edition
only for sharing files and folders to this TV.
The supplied Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials
software does not support following
functions: Transcoding, Remote UI, TV
control, Internet services and Apple iTunes
This manual explains operations with
the English version of Nero MediaHome
4 Essentials as examples. Follow the
explanation referring to the actual operations
of your language version.
If there are too many folders and files in one
folder, it may not operate properly.
For the DLNA option, use the Nero
MediaHome program that is provided with
the TV. However, we cannot guarantee that
third party program will work perfectly.
You can select a channel while viewing the
small preview channel list on your TV screen.
Check your network settings when the
DLNA option does not work properly.
If there is an abnormal operation or an
error occurs in Nero Media Home, the
DLNA option may not work properly. In this
case, exit Nero Media Home and restart
the program. You can download the latest
version of Nero Media Home by clicking
the question mark at the bottom-left of the
program.
When the network is unstable, the device
may be slower or may need to load during
playback.
When playing a video in DLNA mode, the
Multi Audio and Closed Caption features are
not supported.
When selecting Full Screen in DLNA mode,
the ratio of the outputted screen may differ
from the original.
When more than one TV is connected to
a single server in DLNA mode, a file may
not play properly, depending on the server
performance.
If the play time information is not provided
by the server, it is displayed as "- -."
65
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
Installing Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials
Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials is an easy to use
DLNA server software for Windows.
Computer requirements for Nero MediaHome 4
Essentials
Windows® XP (Service Pack 2 or higher),
Windows Vista® (no Service Pack required),
Windows® XP Media Center Edition 2005
(Service Pack 2 or higher), Windows Server®
2003 (Service Pack 1 or higher)
Windows® 7 Home Premium, Professional,
Enterprise or Ultimate (32 and 64-bit)
Windows Vista® 64-bit edition (application
runs in 32-bit mode)
Windows® 7 64-bit edition (application runs
in 32-bit mode)
Hard drive space: 200 MB hard drive space
for a typical installation of Nero MediaHome
stand-alone
1.2 GHz Intel® Pentium® III or AMD
Sempron™ 2200+ processors
Memory: 256 MB RAM
Graphics card with at least 32 MB video
memory, minimum resolution of 800 x 600
pixels, and 16-bit color settings
Windows® Internet Explorer® 6.0 or higher
DirectX® 9.0c revision 30 (August 2006) or
higher
Network environment: 100 Mb Ethernet,
WLAN (IEEE 802.11g), or faster
1 Start up your computer.
2 Close all Microsoft Windows programs and exit
any anti-virus software that may be running.
3 Insert the Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials CD-
ROM into your computer’s CD-ROM drive.
4 Click Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials. The
installation wizard will appear.
5 Click the Next button to display the serial
number input screen. Click Next to go to the
next step.
6 If you accept all conditions, click I accept
the License Conditions check box and click
Next. Installation is not possible without this
agreement.
7 Click Typical and click Next. The installation
process is started.
8 If you want to take part in the anonymous
collection of data, select the check box and
click the Next button.
9 Click the Exit button to complete the
installation.
Sharing files and folders
After installing Nero MediaHome, you must add
folders you wish to share.
1 Double-click the Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials
icon on the desktop.
2 Click Network icon on the left and define your
network name in the Network name field. The
Network name you enter will be recognized by
your TV.
3 Click Shares icon on the left.
4 Click Local Folders tab on the Shared screen.
5 Click Add icon to open the Browse Folder
window.
6 Select the folder containing the files you want
to share. The selected folder is added to the
list of shared folders.
7 Click Start Server icon to start the server.
NOTE
If the shared folders or files are not displayed
on the TV, click the folder on the Local
Folders tab and click Rescan Folder at the
More button.
Visit
http://www.nero.com
for more
information and software tools.
66
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
Playing Shared Media
You can display and play movie, photo and music
content stored on your computer or other DLNA
media servers.
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Smart
Share and press ENTER.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
device you want and press ENTER.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to select DLNA.
Depending on the media server, this TV may
need to get the permission from the server.
Tips for using DLNA DMP
To play the file on the media server, the TV
and the media server must be connected to
the same access point.
File requirements and playback functions on
the Smart Share may differ depending on the
media server used.
There may be some restrictions by file
features and the media server that restrict
playback.
Movie thumbnail is only supported when
DLNA server supports a Movie thumbnail.
If there is an unplayable music file in the
Smart Share menu, the TV will skip the file
and play next file.
Files in a folder can be played only when
they are of the same type.
The file information indicated on the screen
may not always correct for music and movie
files in Smart Share menu
This TV only supports movie subtitle files
supplied by Nero MediaHome 4.
The subtitle file name and movie file name
have to be the same and located in the same
folder.
If subtitle files have been added after a
directory has been indexed already, the user
has to remove and re-add the folder to the
list of shares.
The DRM/*.tp/*.trp file in DLNA server is not
played while Movie List is in operation.
MPO files are not played when Photo List is
in operation.
The playback and operating quality of the
Smart Share function may be affected by
your home network condition.
The files from removable media such as USB
drive, DVD-drive etc. on your media server
may not share properly.
When playing the Media through DLNA
connection, it does not support files
protected by DRM.
Up to 1000 including folders and files can be
recognized.
If there are too many folders and files in one
folder, it may not operate properly.
The DLNA function is not available in some
routers which do not support multicasting.
For more information, refer to your router
manual or contact the manufacturer.
67
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
Connecting DLNA DMR (Digital
Living Network Alliance, Digital
Media Render)
This supports remote playing of media files. Media
from a compatible device (Windows 7, Mobile
Phone with PlayTo, or other compatible DLNA-
DMC device) can be “pushed” to the TV.
The DMR function only works properly when the
TV and PC are on the same local network.
1 To play a file, select the file by using the
“Remote Play” feature in Windows 7.
To do this, right-click on the file you want to
play.
2 You can play a file only on a single TV set
or device even though multiple devices are
connected. The playback speed depends on
the network status.
NOTE
Subtitle is supported only on some DMC
devices.
The DMR function may not work properly in
a wireless network.
The seek function of the DMC only works on
video files.
The DMR is not available when another
function is operating (recording, playback or
Smart Share work etc.).
Refer to the owner’s manual of the mobile
phone or other device to find out how to use
it to play a file.
You can change the name of a connected
TV by double-clicking the item you want
to change in Control Panel > Network and
Internet > View network computers and
devices (For Windows 7).
You cannot change the name of a TV while
DMR media is playing. Change it when
playback is stopped.
68
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
Browsing files
Access the photo, music, or movie lists and
browse files.
1 Connect a USB storage device.
2 Press Home to access the Home menu.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Smart
Share and press ENTER.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
device you want and press ENTER.
5 Press Navigation buttons to scroll to All Media,
Movie List, Photo List, or Music List and press
ENTER.
- All Media: Shows all files in the file list.
- Movie List, Photo List, or Music List: Shows
only one type of file in the file list.
6 Press Navigation buttons to select a folder or
file you want.
12
4
3
5
6
No. Description
1Shows all media folders.
2Current page number/total number of pages.
3Moves to the previous or next page.
4Current page number/total number of pages.
5Files info or thumbnail.
6Available buttons on the remote control.
Thumbnail information
Type Abnormal files Non-supported files
Video
Photo
Music
Tips for using USB storage devices
Type Supported File Formats
Video MPG, MPEG, DAT, TS, TRP, TP, VOB, MP4,
MOV, MKV, DivX, AVI, ASF, WMV, M4V
Max bitrate of playable movie file: 20 Mbps
(Mega bit per second)
Bit rate of audio format: within 32 kbps to 320
kbps (MP3)
Supported external subtitle format: *.smi,
*.srt, *.sub (MicroDVD, SubViewer 1.0/2.0),
*.ass, *.ssa, *.txt (TMPlayer), *.psb
(PowerDivX)
Supported Internal subtitle format: only XSUB
(It is the subtitle format made in DivX files),
Text UTF- 8, SRT, ASS, SSA (It is the subtitle
format used in DivX-Plus HD files)
Photo Do not use the progressive option when
saving JPG files on your PC.
It may take some time to open high-resolution
images in full screen.
File
Extensions
Item Profile
2D jpeg
jpg
jpe
Supported
file format
SOF0:
baseline
SOF1:
Extend
Sequential
SOF2:
Progressive
Photo size Min: 64 x
64
Max -
Normal
Type:
15360 (W)
x 8640 (H)
Progressive
Type: 1920
(W) x 1440
(H)
3D
(For
3D TV)
mpo Supported
file format
mpo
Photo size
4:3 size:
3,648 x
2,736,
2,592 x
1,944,
2,048 x
1,536
3:2 size:
3,648 x
2,432
Music MP3
Bit rate range: 32 Kbps - 320 Kbps
Sampling rate (Sampling Frequency)
MPEG1 layer 3: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
MPEG2 layer 3: 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz
* A copy-protected file will not play.
69
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
Viewing Videos
Play video files on the TV. Your TV can display
video files from a USB storage device.
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Smart
Share and press ENTER.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
device you want and press ENTER.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Movie
List and press ENTER.
5 Press Navigation buttons to select a folder or
file you want and press ENTER.
6 Play a movie by using the following menus/
buttons.
Button Description
Navigation
button Scrolls through the files.
ENTER Plays the highlighted file.
CH (
^
,
v
)Moves to the previous or next
page.
Red button Change device: Changes to a
different input.
Green button Go to root folder.
Yellow
button Go to upper folder.
7 Control playback by using the following
buttons.
Button Description
Stops the playback.
Plays a video.
Pauses or resumes the playback
Scans backward in a file
Scans forward in a file
and Plays videos in slow motion
Red button
and
<
or
>
Selects the frame directly.
The entire file is divided into 10
frames.
Frames may not be displayed
depending on the file.
ENERGY
SAVING
Increases or decreases the
brightness of your screen.
Q.MENU Shows the Option menu (See p.72).
3D
(For 3D TV) Views the 3D imaging.
AV MODE Select the desired source
BACK
Hides the menu on screen.
To see the menu again, press
ENTER button to display.
EXIT Moves to the previous menu
screen.
70
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
Tips for playing video files
The TV does not support the files encoded in
Motion JPEG.
Some user-created subtitles may not work
properly.
Subtitles may not display some special
characters or HTML tags.
Changing font and color in subtitles is not
supported.
Subtitles in non-supported languages are
unavailable.
Video files with subtitle files of 1 MB or
larger may not be played properly.
The screen may suffer from temporary
interruptions such as image stoppage or
faster playback when you change the audio
language.
If you play a damaged video file, the video
file may not be played correctly or some
player functions may not be unavailable.
The TV may not properly play the video files
produced with certain encoders.
If the recorded file does not have video or
audio, either video or audio is not outputted.
If the TV plays the recorded file without
video or audio, either video or audio is not
outputted.
The TV may not smoothly play the video files
with a resolution higher than the supported
resolution for each frame.
The TV may not properly play the video
files not included on the specified type and
format.
The TV may not play the files encoded with
GMC (Global Motion Compensation) or
quarter-pel motion estimation.
The TV supports the only 10,000 sync blocks
within the subtitle file.
The TV supports the H.264/AVC codec up to
the profile level 4.1.
The TV does not support DTS audio codec.
The TV cannot play a video file whose size is
larger than 30 GB.
If you play a video file through the USB
connection that does not support the high
speed, the video player may not work
properly.
The video file and its subtitle should be in
the same folder and the name of the video
file and subtitle should be identical.
The TV may not play the video files in the
supported file format depending on the
encoded condition.
Trick Mode does not support other functions
than if video files do not have index
information.
Video file names that contain special
characters may not be playable.
For 3D WMV files encoded in dualstream,
3D mode is not supported. (For 3D TV)
71
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
Q.MENU options for movie list
1 Press Q. MENU.
A pop-up window will appear.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
option and press ENTER.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to one of
the following options and press ENTER.
Set Video Play.
Option Description
Picture
Size
Selects your desired picture format for
videos.
Full Mode: Files are played in full
screen mode according to the aspect
ratio of video.
Original Mode: Files are played in
their native size.
Audio
Language
Changes the Language Group of the
audio for video files. Files with a single
audio track cannot be selected.
Subtitle
Language The subtitles can be turned on or off.
Language Activated for SMI subtitles and can
select the language within the subtitle.
Code
Page
Subtitle font selection. When set to
default, contents are displayed in the
language set in "Option - Language -
Menu Language."
Option Description
Subtitle
Language
Group
Latin1: English,
Spanish, French
Korean: English,
Korean
Sync
If the video is not
synchronized
with the captions, it
can be adjusted by 0.5
second.
Position Move the location of
the subtitles.
Size Changes the subtitle
font size.
Repeat
Turn on/off repeat function of movie
playback. When turned on, the file
within the folder will be played back
repeatedly. When turned off, if the next
file name is similar to the previous file,
it can be played sequentially.
NOTE
Option values changed in Movie List does
not affect Photo List and Music List.
Option value changed in Photo List and
Music List are changed likewise in Photo List
and Music List excluding Movie List.
When replaying a video file after stopping,
select “Yes” to restart where it previously
stopped.
If continuous series files exist within the
folder, the next file will automatically be
played. But, this excludes cases when the
Repeat function of Movie List Option is
turned “On”.
Set Video.
Allows you to change Video presets (Refer to
“PICTURE Settings” on page 88).
Set Audio.
Allows you to change Audio presets (Refer to
“AUDIO Settings” on page 93).
Set DivX PLUS HD
These options are enabled only when the movie
file being played has the title, edition and authored
chapter information.
Option Description
Title For files with more than one title,
select the title you want to play.
Edition
For files with more than one edition,
select the edition you want to play.
An edition refers to the playback
order set based on the chapters.
Authored
Chapter
Select and play the chapter you
want.
72
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
DivX registration code
Registering the DivX code
The DivX registration code allows you to rent or
purchase the latest movies at
www.divx.com/vod
.
To play a rented or purchased DivX file, the file’s
registration code should be same as your TV’s
DivX registration code.
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press ENTER.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
OPTION and press ENTER.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Smart
Share Setting and press ENTER.
5 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to DivX
VOD Registration and press ENTER.
6 View the registration code of your TV.
7 When you are finished, press EXIT.
NOTE
While you are checking the registration code,
some buttons may not work.
If you use the DivX registration code of
another device, you cannot play the rented
or purchased DivX file. Make sure to use the
DivX registration code assigned to your TV.
The video or audio files that are not
converted by the standard DivX codec may
be corrupted or not be played.
The DivX VOD code allows you to activate
up to 6 devices under one account.
Deactivating the DivX feature
You can deactivate all of the devices through the
web server and block devices from activating.
Delete the existing authentication information to
receive a new DivX user authentication for the
TV. Once this function is executed, a DivX user
authentication is required again to see DivX DRM
files.
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press ENTER.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
OPTION and press ENTER.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Smart
Share Setting and press ENTER.
5 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to DivX
Deregistration and press ENTER.
6 Select Yes to confirm.
7 When you are finished, press EXIT.
73
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
Viewing Photos
You can view image files saved on a USB storage
device. The displays on the screen may based on
the from the model.
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Smart
Share and press ENTER.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
device you want and press ENTER.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Photo
List and press ENTER.
5 Press Navigation buttons to select a folder or
file you want and press ENTER.
6 View a photo by using the following menus/
buttons.
Button Description
Navigation
button Scrolls the file.
ENTER Views the highlighted file.
CH (
^
,
v
)Moves to the previous or next
page.
Red button Change device: Changes to a
different input.
Green button Go to root folder.
Yellow
button Go to upper folder.
7 The following options are available while
viewing photos.
Option Description
Slideshow
Starts or stops a slideshow.
All photos saved in the current
folder display during a slideshow.
To set a slideshow speed, select
Option.
BGM
(Background
Music)
Turns the background music on
or off. To set the background
music folder, select Option.
(
Plasma
)
Displays the current photo in
Original, Monotone, Sepia, Oil
Painting and Vignetting.
(Rotate)
Rotates photos clockwise (90°,
180°, 270°, 360°).
NOTE
The supported photo size is
limited. You cannot rotate a
photo if the resolution of the
rotated width is larger than
the supported resolution size.
Views the photo in full mode or
original mode.
(ENERGY
SAVING)
Increases or decreases the
brightness of your screen.
3D
(For 3D TV) Views the 3D images.
Option Shows the Option menu (See p.75).
Hide
Hides the option window.
To display the options, press
ENTER.
Exit Moves to the previous menu
screen.
74
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
Q.MENU options for photo list
1 Press Q. MENU.
A pop-up window will appear.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
option and press ENTER.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to one of
the following options and press ENTER.
Set Photo View.
Option Description
Slide Speed Selects a slideshow speed (Fast,
Medium, Slow).
BGM
Selects a music folder for the
background music.
Select Repeat or Random option.
NOTE
You cannot change the music
folder while the background
music is playing.
NOTE
Option values changed in Photo List do not
affect Movie List and Music List.
Option values changed in Photo List or
Music List are changed likewise in Photo List
and Music List, but not Movie List
Set Video.
Allows you to change Video settings. (Refer to
“PICTURE Settings” on page 88).
Set Audio.
Allows you to change Audio settings. (Refer to
“AUDIO Settings” on page 93).
75
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
Listening to music
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Smart
Share and press ENTER.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
device you want and press ENTER.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Music
List and press ENTER.
5 Press Navigation buttons to select a folder or
file you want and press ENTER.
6 Play music by using the following menus/
buttons.
Button Description
Navigation
button Scrolls through the files.
ENTER Plays the highlighted file.
CH (
^
,
v
)Moves to the previous or next
page.
Red button Change device: Changes to a
different input.
Green button Go to root folder.
Yellow
button Go to upper folder.
Blue button Open music player.
It is enabled during palying music.
7 Control playback by using the following
buttons.
Button Description
Stops playback.
Plays a music file.
Pauses or resumes playback.
Skips to the previous file.
Skips to the next file.
<
or
>
Indicates a cursor.
(ENERGY
SAVING)
Increases or decreases the
brightness of your screen.
Q.MENU Shows the Option menu (See p.76).
BACK
Hides the option window.
To display the options, press
ENTER.
EXIT Moves to the previous menu
screen.
Tips for playing music files
The TV cannot support the ID3 Tag
embedded MP3 files.
Q.MENU options for music list
1 Press Q. MENU.
A pop-up window will appear.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
option and press ENTER.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to one of
the following options and press ENTER.
NOTE
Option values changed in Movie List does
not affect the Photo List and Music List.
Option value changed in Photo List and
Music List are changed likewise in Photo List
and Music List.
76
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
Set Audio Play.
Select Repeat or Random option.
Set Audio.
Allows you to change Audio settings. (Refer to
“AUDIO Settings” on page 93).
NOTE
The TV will not play copy protected files.
If the TV is not in use for some time
during playback, the information box as a
screensaver will appear to prevent image
burn.
To return to the Music list screen, press
ENTER.
Time elapsed /Duration
File name
77
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
Media Link Function
(This feature is not available for all country.)
The Media Link program allows you to connect to
a Plex Media Server. The Plex Media Server is free
download from
www.plexapp.com
. It will allow to
play media files and download Plex apps. The Plex
apps download to your computer and do not use
any space on the TV.
NOTE
We recommend that you install version
0.9.1.14 or later of PLEX Media Server on
your Mac or PC. (Download the installation
file at http://www.plexapp.com/medialink)
GUI is displayed in English and the data
transmitted will not be displayed when
using the following languages: Thai, Arabic,
Persian, Hebrew, Kurdish.
When using the video plug-in, initial buffering
may take a while if the TV does not support a
file to be played and conversion needs to be
performed on the computer. The conversion
performance may vary depending on the
computer’s performance and the network
speed.
When playing the files stored on the
computer (movies, TV shows, music), the
formats supported are the same as those
for the DLNA function. The skip to content
function is not supported when playing
music. (Same for DLNA)
You may experience problems when playing
HD movies over Wi-Fi due to the network
slowing down.
When using a router, the TV may not detect
the computer due to the router settings. (For
example, when using the multicast forward
function in some routers, TVs cannot detect
computers via Wi-Fi.)
Some plug-ins may not work, depending on
the media format.
Plug-ins are subject to change and may
stop working without prior notice, at the
providers’ discretion.
Media Link Connection
1 Your TV must be connected to your home
network. Either using a wired or wireless
connection.
2 Download the Plex Media Server and install it.
- You can download it at
http://www.plexapp.
com/medialink
.
- For more information on how to install it,
please visit the website above.
3 When running PLEX for the first time, the
wizard guides you through the steps to set up
the program.
- For information on how to use the wizard,
please visit the website above.
78
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
Using Media Link
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
Media Link and press ENTER.
3 The Media Link sections of the connected
computer are displayed. Select an icon to view
the shared media in that category.
12
3 5 6 7
4
Option Description
1This is a list of categories you set on the
connected computer.
2This is a list of plug-ins for online content.
3Change the section sorting.
By server name: Sort the list by server
name.
By item name: Sort the list by item
name.
4Select another device.
5Using PLEX Online, you can install, remove
or update applications on the computer.
6Move to the previous screen.
7Exit Media Link.
Viewing Movies
Media Link will retrieve information on shared
movies as described below.
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
Media Link and press ENTER.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
Video and press ENTER.
1
2
3 4 6 7
5
Option Description
1Show information for the selected movie.
2Show images captured from the movie file.
3Search movies within the section.
4Display the list according to the selected
filter.
5
Select to play the movie in full screen
mode. If the movie has already been
played, you can continue from the last
scene.
6Move to the previous screen.
7Exit Media Link.
79
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
Using Music Section
You can view information for the music files set
for the Music section and enjoy them.
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
Media Link and press ENTER.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
Music section and press ENTER.
1
2
4 5 6 7
3
Option Description
1Sort the music files in the selected section
in the order of artist > album > song title.
2Select a folder or a song.
3Show the artist, album and information for
the selected music.
4Search music files within the section.
5Display the list according to the selected
filter.
6Move to the previous screen.
7Exit Media Link.
Using TV Program Section
You can view information for the programs
contained in the TV Show section and enjoy them.
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
Media Link and press ENTER.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the TV
Show section and press ENTER.
1
2
4 5 6 7
3
Option Description
1Sort the TV program files in the selected
section in the order of Program name >
season > episode.
2Select a folder or a program.
3Show information for the selected
program.
4Search TV Programs within the section.
5Display the list according to the selected
filter.
6Move to the previous screen.
7Exit Media Link.
80
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
Installing Plug-Ins
Media Link allows you to install plug-ins to enjoy
media content on the web.
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
Media Link and press ENTER.
3 Press the yellow button to select PLEX online.
1
2
3 4
Option Description
1
Move the cursor to a plug-in to view the
plug-in information on the right pane.
Plug-ins already installed: You can run,
update, reinstall or remove them.
Plug-ins not yet installed: You can install
them.
Once installed, you can run the plug-in by
selecting Video, Music or Picture Plug-in
from the Media Link main screen.
2A list of plug-ins available for installation.
3Move to the previous screen.
4Exit Media Link.
81
ENG
ENGLISH
ENTERTAINMENT
3D IMAGING (FOR 3D
TV)
3D Technology
This TV can display in 3D via 3D broadcasting or
when the TV is connected to a compatible device,
such as a Blu-ray 3D Player. The viewer must
wear compatible 3D glasses in order to see these
images in 3D format.
When watching 3D imaging
To watch the TV in 3D, you must put on your
3D glasses. For best results, you should wear
LG Brand 3D glasses. The 3D imaging may not
display properly when using another brand of 3D
glasses. Please see the 3D glasses manual for
instructions on how to use the 3D glasses.
When watching 2D images, it is recommended
to take off the 3D glasses. If you watch 2D
images with the 3D glasses on, you may see
distorted images.
(
LCD
)
We recommend that you maintain a distance of
at least twice the screen diagonal length when
watching 3D videos.
(
Plasma
)
After powering on the TV, a few seconds
may be needed for your TV to calibrate.
The TV may flicker slightly if the 3D imaging
is displayed under 3 wavelength fluorescent
light (50 Hz - 60 Hz) or magnetic fluorescent
lamp (50Hz - 60 Hz). In such instances, it is
recommended to turn the lights off.
If there is an obstacle between the TV and
the 3D glasses, the 3D imaging may not
display properly.
Do not use the TV in close proximity to other
electronic equipments and RF equipments.
The 3D imaging may not display if it is
viewed while you are lying down.
It may take a moment for you to see the
3D imaging if you look away from the TV
and then revert your eyes back to the 3D
program.
82
ENG
ENGLISH
3D IMAGING
When using 3D Glasses
Do not use the 3D glasses to replace your
corrective glasses, sunglasses or protective
goggles.
Do not store the 3D glasses in hot or cold
locations.
Do not drop objects onto the 3D glasses. Do not
drop or bend the glasses.
Since the lenses of the 3D glasses are easily
scratched, make sure to clean only with a soft
cloth. Shake off any dust before using the cloth
since the glasses are easily scratched.
A communication failure may occur if the
glasses are near electronic devices that use the
same bandwidth (2.4 GHz), such as a microwave
oven or wireless LAN product.
3D Imaging Viewing Range (
Plasma
)
TV size, viewing angle & other circumstances
may change the viewing distance and the angle of
view.
Viewing Distance Maximum Viewing Distance
2 m - 7 m
(6.5 ft - 22.9 ft)
10 m
(32.8 ft)
83
ENG
ENGLISH
3D IMAGING
Viewing 3D Imaging
1 Play the video produced in 3D.
2 Press 3D to watch 3D imaging.
3 Wear the 3D glasses.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll the OK
and press ENTER.
5 Press the Navigation buttons to select the
shape and press ENTER.
Mode Description
2D » 3D Changed from 2D imaging to
3D imaging.
2D-to-3D converted videos
may appear less realistic than
titles originally produced as 3D
videos.
Side by Side
Top & Bottom
Checker Board
Frame
Sequential
6 Press 3D button to 2D Off or 3D Off.
Option Description
3D -> 2D Displays images in 2D without
any 3D effects.
3D Off Displays images in original format.
2D -> 3D Displays images in 3D.
Cancel Close the pop-up window.
Setting 3D Imaging
1 Press the 3D OPTION while viewing 3D
imaging.
A pop-up window will appear.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to one of
the following options and press ENTER.
3D Mode Setting
Option
(Depending on
model)
Description
3D Picture Size
Cuts off the outer edges of the
picture and stretch it to fit the full
screen in 3D mode.
3D Picture
Correction
Select Left/Right or Right/Left.
Select the screen with 3D video
with better visibility.
3D Depth
Adjusts the stereoscopic effect of
the 3D image converted from 2D
image.
3D Viewpoint
Moves the 3D image to front and
back to adjust the 3D perspective
view.
3D Picture
Balance
Adjusts the color and brightness
difference between the right and
left sides of the picture in 3D
mode.
3D
Optimization
Optimizes the 3D image screen
for the viewing environment.
84
ENG
ENGLISH
3D IMAGING
Set Video.
Allows you to change Video settings (Refer to
“PICTURE Settings” on page 88).
Set Audio.
Allows you to change Audio settings (Refer to
“AUDIO Settings” on page 93).
CAUTION
Some menus may not work while viewing
3D imaging.
The 3D imaging is disabled automatically
when switching input source or DTV channel.
The screen may not be displayed properly if
you view 2D images in 3D imaging mode.
3D effect can be seen when 3D Mode is
selected appropriately for the 3D input signal
supplied to the TV.
For *mpo files (3D camera files), the 3D
imaging mode is enabled automatically.
NOTE
(
LCD
)
If viewing 3D imaging, “Power indicator” is
turned off automatically.
You can only choose "Off or Cinema" with
the AV MODE button on the remote control.
Energy Saving is disabled while playing in
3D.
Home menu is not available while playing in
3D.
You cannot enter the Home menu while
watching 3D imaging.
85
ENG
ENGLISH
3D IMAGING
CUSTOMIZING TV SETTINGS
The SETUP Menu
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to select the SETUP menu and press ENTER.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to one of the following menus and press ENTER.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the setting or option you want and press ENTER.
5 When you are finished, press EXIT.
Menu Description
?
CHANNEL Sets up and edit channels.
?
PICTURE Adjusts the image size, quality, or effect.
?
AUDIO Adjusts the sound quality, effect, or volume level.
?
TIME Sets the time, date, or Timer feature.
?
LOCK Locks or unlocks channels and programs.
?
OPTION Customizes the general settings.
?
NETWORK Sets up the network setting.
?SUPPORT Checks the customer information.
86
ENG
ENGLISH
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
Customizing Settings
CHANNEL Settings
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to SETUP and press ENTER.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to CHANNEL and press
ENTER.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the setting or option you
want and press ENTER.
- To return to the previous level, press BACK.
5 When you are finished, press EXIT.
The available channel settings are described in the following.
Setting Description
Auto Tuning Tunes and stores all available channels through antennas or cable inputs (See p.42).
Manual Tuning Tunes and stores the channels you want manually (See p.42).
Channel Edit Adds or deletes channels (See p.42).
?
87
ENG
ENGLISH
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
PICTURE Settings
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to SETUP and press ENTER.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to PICTURE and press
ENTER.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the setting or option you
want and press ENTER.
- To return to the previous level, press BACK.
5 When you are finished, press EXIT.
The available picture settings are described in the following.
Setting Description
Aspect Ratio Changes the image size to view images at its optimal size (See p.45).
Set 3D Video
(For 3D TV)
Sets the 3D imaging option (See p.84).
Picture Wizard Adjusts the image quality and calibrates the screen.
The customized options will be saved as Expert1 in the Picture Mode.
NOTE
If you use Picture Wizard, the Energy Saving feature will turn off automatically.
To reset changes made by Picture Wizard, operate Picture Reset when Picture Mode is on
Expert1.
Energy Saving Reduces the power consumption by adjusting the screen brightness.
NOTE
When selecting Auto or Maximum, Backlight will not work (
LCD
).
Option
Auto (
LCD
) The backlight is adjusted automatically corresponding to the surroundings
when selecting Auto using the Intelligent sensor feature.
Intelligent sensor
(
Plasma
)
The most suitable picture is automatically adjusted corresponding to the
surroundings.
Off Select if this feature is not necessary.
Minimum/
Medium/Maximum
Selects the brightness level.
Screen off The screen turns off in 3 seconds.
Pressing any button of the remote control will turn on the screen again.
?
88
ENG
ENGLISH
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
Setting Description
Picture Mode Selects one of the preset image or customizes options in each mode for the best TV screen
performance. You are also able to customize advanced options of each mode.
The available preset picture modes vary depending on the TV.
NOTE
(
LCD
) If you select Intelligent Sensor, the Energy saving feature will switch to Auto
automatically .
If you select THX Cinema or THX Bright Room, the Aspect ratio feature will switch to Just
scan automatically.
Mode (Depending on model)
Intelligent Sensor Sets the TV to adjust the image settings, such as contrast, brightness,
sharpness, color, or tint, automatically corresponding to the surrounding
environments.
Vivid Adjusts the video image for the retail environment by enhancing the contrast,
brightness, color, and sharpness.
Standard Adjusts the image for the normal environment.
APS Maximizes video images reducing power consumption without hurting picture
quality.
Cinema Optimizes video image for a cinematic look to enjoy movies as if you are in a
movie theater.
THX Cinema,
THX Bright Room
Provides a cinema experience while watching a movie at home. The user
will be able enjoy the best level of screen quality without any separate
adjustments.
»THX Cinema express the optimal screen quality when the room is dark.
» THX Bright Room express the optimal screen quality when the room is
bright.
NOTE
THX : THX (Thomlinson Holman’s Experiment) is an audio and video
certification standard established by George Lucas and Thomlinson. A
THX certified display guarantees screen quality that exceeds the display
standard specification in both hardware and software.
Sport Optimizes the video image for high and dynamic actions by emphasizing
primary colors such as white, grass, or sky blue.
Game Optimizes the video image for a fast gaming screen for PCs or games.
Photo Optimizes the still image like a photo file in HDMI, USB mode (i.e, when
connecting the external device like a DSLR)
Expert 1, 2 or
ISFccc Expert 1, 2
Adjusts the detailed video image settings for video experts as well as general
viewers.
NOTE
ISFccc (ISFccc: Imaging Science Foundation Certified Calibration
Control) (Except LW5700, LV5400, LK550 series): This TV contains
the detailed calibrations necessary for professional certification by
the Imaging Science Foundation. The resulting ISF “day” and “night”
modes will then be accessible by the user to experience the best their
LG HDTV has to offer.
Sophisticated and detailed calibrations can be made through the ISFccc
mode.
Detailed calibration requires a licensed technician. Please contact your
local dealer to inquire about an ISF certified technician.
89
ENG
ENGLISH
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
Setting Description
TruMotion
(Depending on
model)
Advance video technology that provides clearer, smoother images, even during fast action scenes
creating a more stable structure for a crisper picture.
TruMotion works with all inputs except PC mode.
If you enable “TruMotion”, noise may appear on the screen. If this occurs, set “TruMotion” to “Off”.
If you select “Picture Mode-Game ”, set “TruMotion” to “Off”.
Mode
High Provides smoother picture movement.
Low Provides smooth picture movement. Use this setting for standard use.
Off Turn off TruMotion operation.
User De-Judder: Adjusts noise of the screen.
De-Blur: Adjusts after-image of the screen.
SCREEN
(RGB-PC)
Customizes the PC display options.
Option
Resolution Selects a proper resolution.
Auto Configure Sets the TV to optimize the options automatically for the TV display.
Position Locates the image at the proper position.
Size Adjusts the image size.
Phase Eliminates horizontal streaking.
Reset Restores the options to the default setting.
LED Local
Dimming
(Depending on
model)
After analysing the signal of the input video by areas of the screen, it adjusts the backlight to
improve the contrast ratio.
Mode
Off Turn off LED Local Dimming operation.
Low Brightens the picture and deepens black levels using the soft local dimming.
Medium Deepens black levels using the strong local dimming.
High Clears the picture and deepens black levels using the strong local dimming.
Basic Image Options
Setting Description
Backlight (
LCD
) Adjusts the brightness of the screen by controlling the LCD backlight. If you decrease the
brightness level, the screen becomes darker and the power consumption will be reduced
without any video signal loss.
NOTE
If you use the “Energy saving - Off, Minimum, Medium”, Backlight will be available.
Contrast Increases or decreases the gradient of the video signal. You may use Contrast when the
bright part of the picture is saturated.
Brightness Adjusts the base level of the signal in the picture.
Sharpness Adjusts the level of sharpness in the edges between the light and dark areas of the picture.
The lower the level, the softer the image.
Color Adjusts intensity of all colors.
Tint Adjusts the balance between red and green levels.
90
ENG
ENGLISH
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
Setting Description
Color Temp. Set to warm to enhance hotter colors such as red, or set to cool to enhance cooler colors
such as blue.
Advanced Control or
Expert Control
Customizes the advanced options.
Picture Reset Restores the options of each mode to the factory default.
Advanced Image Options (Depending on model)
Setting Description
Dynamic Contrast Adjusts the contrast to keep it at the best level according to the brightness of the screen.
The picture is improved by making bright parts brighter and dark parts darker.
Dynamic Color Adjusts screen colors so that they look livelier, richer and clearer. This feature enhances hue,
saturation and luminance so that red, blue and green white look more vivid.
Skin Color It detects the skin area of video and adjusts it to express a natural skin color.
Noise Reduction Reduces screen noise without compromising video quality.
MPEG Noise Reduction Removes noise caused by compressing video.
Super Resolution Provides a crystal-clear picture by improving the details in an area that has a blurry or unclear
picture.
Gamma You can adjust brightness of dark area and middle gray level area of the picture.
»Low: Make the dark and middle gray level areas brighter.
»Medium: Express the original picture level.
»High: Make the dark and middle gray level area darker.
Black Level Sets black level of the screen to proper level. This function is available in the following
modes: TV(NTSC-M/J, PAL-M, PAL-N), AV (NTSC-M/J, PAL-M, PAL-N), HDMI or Component.
»Auto: Realizing the black level of the screen and set it to High or Low automatically.
»Low: The reflection of the screen gets darker.
»High: The reflection of the screen gets brighter.
Clear White Make the white area of screen brighter and more white.
Eye Care Adjusts the brightness of the screen to prevent the screen from being too bright. Dims
extremely bright pictures.
This feature is enabled in “Picture Mode-Standard, Game”.
Real Cinema or Film
Mode
Makes video clips recorded in film look more natural by eliminating judder effect.
DVD and Blu-ray movies are filmed at 24 frames per second (fps). With LG Real Cinema,
every frame is consistently processed 5 times in 1/24 of a second producing 120 fps with
TruMotion or 2 times in 1/24 of a second producing 48 fps without TruMotion, thus totally
eliminating the judder effect.
This function can also work when TruMotion is off.
Color Gamut
Plasma
Advanced Control, Expert Control
»Maximizes the utilization of color to increase color quality.
»Standard: Displays standard set of colors.
»Wide: Increases number of colors used.
Photo mode
»Wide: Increases number of colors used.
»sRGB: Mode to display sRGB standard color gamut”
LCD
Advanced Control
»Maximizes the utilization of color to increase color quality.
»Standard: Displays standard set of colors.
»Wide: Increase number of colors used.
Expert Control
Displays color domain of the signal.
»Standard: Displays standard set of colors.
»Wide: Increase number of colors used.
»EBU: Mode to display EBU standard color area.
»SMPTE: Mode to display SMPTE standard color area.
»BT709: Mode to display BT709 standard color area.
91
ENG
ENGLISH
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
Setting Description
Edge Enhancer Shows clearer and distinctive yet natural edges of the video.
This function works well over Sharpness UI 60 value.
xvYCC This is produces richer colors.
This feature represents rich colors as much as a conventional video signal.
This function is enabled in “Picture mode - Cinema, Expert” when xvYCC signal is inputted
through HDMI.
Color Filter This is the function to filter the specific colors of the video.
You can use the RGB filter to set color saturation and hue accurately.
Expert Pattern This is the pattern used for expert adjustment
This function is enabled in “Picture Mode - Expert” when you watch DTV.
Color Temperature Adjusts the overall color of the screen by changing the white baseline.
Plasma
a. Method : 2 Points
Pattern: Inner, Outer
Red/Green/Blue Contrast, Red/Green/Blue Brightness: The adjustment range is -50
to +50.
b. Method : 20 Point IRE
IRE (Institute of Radio Engineers) is the unit to display the size of the video signal
and can be set among 0, 5, 10, 15 - 100 Plasma TV. You can adjust Red, Green or
Blue according to each setting.
Red/Green/Blue: The adjustment range is -50 - +50.
c. Apply to all inputs
LCD
a. Gamma : Select 1.9, 2.2, 2.4
b. Method : 2 Points
Pattern: Inner, Outer
Red/Green/Blue Contrast, Red/Green/Blue Brightness
c. Method : 10 Point IRE
Pattern: Inner, Outer
IRE (Institute of Radio Engineers) is the unit to display the size of the video
signal and can be set among 10, 20, 30 - 100. You can adjust Red, Green or Blue
according to each setting.
Luminance: This function displays calculated luminance value for 2.2 gamma. You
can input luminance value you want at 100 IRE, than the target luminance value
for 2.2 gamma is displayed at every 10 steps from 10 IRE to 90 IRE.
Red/Green/Blue: The adjustment range is -50 - +50.
d. Apply to all inputs
Color Management
System
As the tool used by the experts to make adjustments by using the test patterns, this does
not affect other colors but can be used to selectively adjust the 6 color areas (Red/Green/
Blue/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow).
Color difference may not be distinctive even when you make the adjustments for the general
video.
Adjusts Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan/Magenta.
» Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan/Magenta Color: The adjustment range is -30 - +30.
» Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan/Magenta Tint: The adjustment range is -30 - +30.
» This feature is disable in RGB-PC and HDMI-PC mode.
92
ENG
ENGLISH
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
AUDIO Settings
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to SETUP and press ENTER.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to AUDIO and press ENTER.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the setting or option you
want and press ENTER.
- To return to the previous level, press BACK.
5 When you are finished, press EXIT.
The available audio settings are described in the following.
Setting Description
Auto Volume Activates the Auto Volume feature to keep the volume level consistent whenever you change
channels. The volume level may not be consistent due to different signal conditions of broadcasting
stations.
Clear Voice II Sets whether to enhance human voice clarity. You can adjust the level of clarity when you set this
feature on.
Balance Adjust balance between the left and right speakers according to your room environment.
Sound Mode Selects one of the preset sound modes or customizes options in each mode.
Mode
Standard Select when you want standard-quality sound.
Music Select when you listen to music.
Cinema Select when you watch movies.
Sport Select when you watch sports events.
Game Select when you play games.
NOTE
If sound quality or volume is not at the level you want, it is recommended to use a separate
home theater system or amplifier to cope with different user environments.
If the Clear Voice II feature is on, Infinite 3D Surround will not be activated.
Option
Infinite 3D
Surround
Patents LG proprietary sound processing technology that strives immersive 5.1
surround sound with just two front speakers.
Treble Controls the dominant sounds in the output. When you turn up the treble, it will
increase the output to the higher frequency range.
Bass Controls the softer sounds in the output. When you turn up the bass, it will
increase the output to the lower frequency range.
Sound Reset Resets the sound mode to the default setting.
?
93
ENG
ENGLISH
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
Setting Description
Sound
Optimizer
Optimizes the sound depending on the environment in which the TV is installed.
Option
Normal Normal sound mode.
Wall Mount Type Optimized sound mode for a wall-mounted TV.
Stand type Optimized sound mode for a stand-type TV.
TV Speaker Turns on the internal speaker of the TV when using an external Hi-Fi system. You can use the TV
speaker as an audio output device even if there is no video input.
ARC Mode
(Audio Return
Channel)
When using an external audio device with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) feature, SPDIF can be
output using only a High Speed HDMI cable without an additional optical cable.
NOTE
Some HDMI cables may not support this mode (A High Speed HDMI cable is recommended).
The ARC mode only works on the HDMI 1 input on the TV.
Activates the SIMPLINK feature to use this feature.
Option
On If the device with the ARC feature is turned on, the device speaker is
automatically used when SIMPLINK is enabled.
Off Even if the device with the ARC feature is turned on and SIMPLINK is enabled,
the device speaker is not automatically used.
AV Sync. If the video and sound are not synced, you can adjust it manually.
»(-) setting : Make audio output faster than the default.
»(+) setting : Make audio output slower than the default.
Option
AV Sync. Adjusts the sync of the TV speaker and SPDIF.
TV Speaker Adjusts the sync of the sound from the TV’s internal speaker.
SPDIF (Sony
Philips Digital
InterFace)
Adjusts the sync of the sound from an external speaker connected to the digital
audio output port.
94
ENG
ENGLISH
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
TIME Settings
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to SETUP and press ENTER.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to TIME and press ENTER.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the setting or option you
want and press ENTER.
- To return to the previous level, press BACK.
5 When you are finished, press EXIT.
The available time settings are described in the following.
Setting Description
Clock Sets the time, date, time zone, and daylight-saving time feature.
The time will be set automatically according to a digital channel signal which includes time
information provided by the broadcasting station. If not, set the time and date manually.
Off Time/On Time Sets the time to turn on or off the TV automatically. To use this function, you should set the current
time and date in advance.
NOTE
If you do not press any button within 2 hours after the TV turns on by the On Time feature,
the TV enters the Standby mode automatically.
If you set both Off time and On time features to the same time, the Off time feature
overrides the On time feature.
Sleep Timer Sets the length of time until the TV to turns off. When you turn the TV off and turn it on again, the
Sleep timer feature will be set to off.
.
?
95
ENG
ENGLISH
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
LOCK Settings
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to SETUP and press ENTER.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to LOCK and press ENTER.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the setting or option you
want and press ENTER.
- To return to the previous level, press BACK.
5 When you are finished, press EXIT.
The available lock settings are described in the following.
Setting Description
Set Password Changes the 4-digit password. The default PIN is “0-0-0-0”.
If you forget your password, press “0-3-2-5” on the remote control.
Lock System Activates or deactivates the lock system.
Block Channel Blocks the channels that contain inappropriate contents for children. The channels can be selected
but the screen is blank and the audio is muted.
To watch a locked channel, enter the password.
Movie Rating Blocks the movies that are only broadcasted on the TV and contain inappropriate contents, based on
the Motion Picture Association of America (MPAA) rating.
Rating
G General audiences – All ages admitted
PG Parental guidance suggested – Some material may not be suitable for children
PG-13 Patents strongly cautioned – Some material may be inappropriate for children
under 13
R Restricted – Under 17 requires accompanying parent or adult guardian
NC-17 No one 17 and under admitted.
X Adults only
TV Rating-
Children
(Depending on
model)
Blocks the children’s TV programs that parents do not want their children to watch. To block other
TV programs, you should set the TV Rating-General feature.
Rating
Age TV-Y (All children, including children from ages 2-6)
TV-Y7 (Directed to older children, suitable for children age 6 and above)
Fantasy Violence TY-Y7 (Directed to older children – Fantasy violence, suitable for children age 6
and above, containing more intense or combative fantasy violence)
?
96
ENG
ENGLISH
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
Setting Description
TV Rating-
General
(Depending on
model)
Blocks the TV programs that you want based on the ratings by using the Parental Control Function
(V-Chip).
NOTE
The V-Chip electronically reads TV program ratings and allows parents to block program that
are unsuitable for children.
Rating
Age TV-G (General audience, suitable for all ages)
TV-PG (Parental guidance suggested, containing material that are unsuitable for
younger children)
TV-14 (Parents strongly cautioned, containing material that are unsuitable for
children age 14 and under)
TV-MA (Mature audience only, unsuitable for children age under 17)
Dialog
(suggestive
dialogue)
TV-PG or TV-14
Language (coarse
language)
TV-PG, TV-14, or TV-MA
Sex (sexual
situation)
TV-PG, TV-14, or TV-MA
Violence TV-PG, TV-14, or TV-MA
TV Rating-
English
(Depending on
model)
Selecting Canadian English rating system.
Rating
E Exempt
C Children
C8+ Children eight years and older
G General programming, suitable for all audiences
PG Parental Guidance
14+ Viewers 14 years and older
18+ Adult programming
Blocking Off Permits all programs
TV Rating-
French
(Depending on
model)
Selecting Canadian French rating system.
Rating
E Exempt
G General
8ans+ General-Not convenient for little children
13ans+ Not convenient for children of 13 years and younger
16ans+ Not convenient for children of 16 years and younger
18ans+ This programs is only for adults
Blocking Off Permits all programs
Downloadable
Rating
This function operates only when TV has received Region5 Rating data.
The name of the rating option may differ.
NOTE
This feature is available only for digital channels.
Input Block Block the input sources.
97
ENG
ENGLISH
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
OPTION Settings
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to SETUP and press ENTER.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to OPTION and press ENTER.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the setting or option you
want and press ENTER.
- To return to the previous level, press BACK.
5 When you are finished, press EXIT.
The available general settings are described in the following.
Setting Description
Language Selects a desired language.
Option
Menu Language Selects a language for the display text.
Audio Language Selects an audio language for your program. This feature operates only in the
DTV or CADTV mode.
Caption Sets whether to display captions and customize your option in each mode.
Mode
CC 1-4 (Closed
Captioning)
Displays the audio portion of a TV program as text on the TV screen. CC1 is the
most common mode in use.
- Field 1 data channels: two Captions (CC1, CC2) and two Text (T1, T2).
- Field 2 data channels: two Captions (CC3, CC4) and two Text (T3, T4).
Text 1-4
Service 1-6 This is only available for the digital broadcasting system.
Option (For Digital Broadcasting)
Size Selects the word size.
Font Selects a typeface for the text.
Text Color Selects a color for the text.
Text Opacity Adjusts the opacity for the text color.
Bg Color Selects a background color.
Bg Opacity Adjusts the opacity for the background color.
Edge Type Selects an edge type.
Edge Color Selects a color for the edges.
Power Indicator
(Depending on
model)
Sets to turn on or off the indicator light on the TV.
Option
Standby Light Set to turn on or off the indicator light in Standby mode.
Power Light Set to turn on or off the indicator light when you turn on the power.
?
98
ENG
ENGLISH
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
Setting Description
ISM Method
(
Plasma
)
Prevents image sticking or removes a ghost image.
A frozen still picture displayed on the screen for prolonged periods can result in a ghost image.
Mode
Normal Sets it if image sticking is never a problem.
Orbiter Avoids a ghost image on the screen.
The image will move every 2 minutes to help prevent ghost images. However, it
is best not to allow any fixed image to remain on the screen.
Color Wash Removes a ghost image on the screen.
The color block with the screen moved a little and the white pattern are
alternately displayed. It is difficult to see the after image on all colors.
Once it has been corrected it will not be visible in any color.
White Wash Removes a ghost image on the screen.
Use sparingly. Watch the TV normally for a while before using this feature to see
if the ghost image disappears on its own.
NOTE
An excessive ghosted image may be impossible to clear entirely with
White Wash. To return to normal viewing, press the any button.
Pointer
(Depending on
model)
Sets the pointer option of the magic motion remote control.
Option
Speed Changes the pointer speed.
Shape Selects the pointer shape.
Size Changes the pointer size.
Alignment Align the remote control’s direction with the pointer on your TV screen by
shaking the remote control left and right. Then, the pointer automatically moves
to the center of the screen.
Smart Share
Setting
Sets the DivX and DLNA option.
Option
DivX VOD
Registration
Registers your TV to play DivX protected videos (See p.73).
DivX
Deregistration
Deregisters your TV (See p.73).
DMR Activates or deactivates the DMR (Digital Media Render) connection.
99
ENG
ENGLISH
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
Setting Description
Initial Setting Resets the TV to factory default and erases all stored channels.
Customizes the TV settings to suit your preference. The initial setup screen will appear when you
turn on the TV for the first time.
NOTE
When selecting “Lock System - On”in the LOCK menu, the message to enter the password
appears.
If you forget your password, press “0-3-2-5” on the remote control.
Setting
Language Selects a desired language.
Mode Setting Selects Home Use for the home environment.
Selects Store Demo for the retail environment.
Selects Demo Mode to set to show special features of the TV. You can cancel
the demo mode by pressing any buttons except the Volume and Mute buttons.
NOTE
When selecting Store Demo, Demo Mode will be activated.
Power Indicator
(LED LCD TV)
Turns the power indicator light on or off.
Time Zone Sets the time zone and daylight saving.
Auto Tuning Scans and saves available channels automatically.
Set ID Adds an ID to the connected devices.
Mode Setting Default selection is “Home Use”. We recommend setting the TV to “Home Use” mode for the best
picture in your home environment.
Option
Home Use Selects it for the home environment.
Store Demo Selects it for the retail environment.
Demo Mode Sets to show special features of the TV. You can cancel the demo mode by
pressing any buttons except the Volume and Mute buttons.
IR Blaster
(Depending on
model)
Adjusts when connecting Wireless media box (sold seperate).
For futher information, refer to the optional "Wireless media box" manual for operating insturctions.
100
ENG
ENGLISH
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
NETWORK Settings
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to SETUP and press ENTER.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to NETWORK and press
ENTER.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the setting or option you
want and press ENTER.
- To return to the previous level, press BACK.
5 When you are finished, press EXIT.
The available network settings are described in the following.
Setting Description
Network Setting Configure the network settings (See p.48).
Network Status Display the network status (See p.53).
Smart TV
Setting
Set the region for which weather forecast is provided and manage the IDs added to the TV.
Setting
Country Setting Set the country for premium services. Different premium services are
provided depending on the country you set.
Weather Effect Sets the region for the weather to be displayed on the background of the
premium service.
Select your region.
Premium Version Display the version of the premium service.
ID Management Manage the login history of the IDs added to the TV.
Reset Delete all IDs added on the TV.
Legal Notice Display the Legal notice (See p.55).
ESN (Depending
on model)
View the supplied Netfilx Electronic Serial Number (ESN)
?
101
ENG
ENGLISH
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
SUPPORT Settings
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to SETUP and press ENTER.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to SUPPORT and press
ENTER.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the setting or option you
want and press ENTER.
- To return to the previous level, press BACK.
5 When you are finished, press EXIT.
The available support settings are described in the following.
Setting Description
Software
Update
Update the TV with the latest firmware.
Picture Test Executes picture or built-in melody sound tests.
»If this test has an error, select Yes. You will see product or service information.
» If this test has no errors, check the connection status of external devices and refer to the
manual of external devices.
Sound Test
Product/Service
Info.
Shows the product or service information.
Customer Service Center can differ by country.
Initialization of
Premium
Initialize the premium menu if an error occurs while updating the premium menu.
Then, the TV automatically switches off and then back on.
?
?
102
ENG
ENGLISH
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
MAKING CONNECTIONS
Connect various external devices to the TV and switch input modes to select an external device. For more
information on external device’s connection, refer to the manual provided with each device.
Available external devices are: HD receivers, DVD players, VCRs, audio systems, USB storage devices, PC,
gaming devices, and other external devices.
NOTE
If you record a TV program on a DVD recorder or VCR, make sure to connect the TV signal input cable
to the TV through a DVD recorder or VCR. For more information on recording, refer to the manual
provided with the connected device.
The external device connection may differ from the model.
Connect external devices to the TV regardless of the order of the TV port.
103
ENG
ENGLISH
MAKING CONNECTIONS
Connection Overview
Connect various external devices to the ports on the TV back panel.
1 Find an external device you want to connect to your TV as shown on the following illustration.
2 Check the connection type of the external device.
3 Go to the appropriate illustration and check the connection details.
NOTE
If you connect a gaming device to the TV, use the cable supplied with the gaming device.
Refer to the external equipment’s manual for operating instructions.
HDMI – See p.105, p.110
DVI – See p.106, p.111
Component – See p.107
Composite – See p.108
RGB – See p.112
Memory storage – See p.115
Memory card reader – See p.115
Digital – See p.113
HD Receiver DVD VCR
USB
Speaker
PC Gaming Device
104
ENG
ENGLISH
MAKING CONNECTIONS
Connecting to a HD receiver,
DVD, or VCR player
Connect a HD receiver, DVD, or VCR player to the
TV and select an appropriate input mode.
HDMI Connection
Transmits the digital video and audio signals from
an external device to the TV. Connect the external
device and the TV with the HDMI cable as shown
in the following illustration.
NOTE
Use the latest High Speed HDMI™ Cable
with CEC (Customer Electronics Control)
function.
High Speed HDMI™ Cables are tested to
carry an HD signal up to 1080p and higher.
W
IRELE
SS
CO
NTR
O
L
RS-232C IN (CONTROL&SERVICE
)
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
IN1
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
AUDIO
VIDE
O
L
/MON
O
R
AV IN1
ꔡ
I
N 1
(
AR
C)
/
DV
I
I
N
2
/
DVI
I
N 3
/
DVI
IN
4
/
DVI
LAN
R
GB IN (PC
)
OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO
OUT
PTICAL
DIGIT
TICAL DIGIT
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE
IN
ANTENNA
ANTENNA
A
V IN 2
A
U
DI
O
/
VIDE
O
CO
MP
O
NENT IN 2
AUDIO / Y P
B
P
R
H
/
P
HDD I
N
US
B IN 1
U
SB A
pp
s
US
B IN 2
HDMI
IN 1 (ARC)
/DVI
IN 2
/DVI
IN 3
/DVI
IN 4
/DVI
W
IRELE
SS
CO
NTR
OL
R
S
-232
C
IN
(CO
NTR
O
L
&S
ERVI
C
E
)
ꔡ
RGB IN (PC)
O
PTICAL DIGITA
L
AUDIO OU
T
AUDI
O
IN
(
R
G
B
/
DVI
)
L
AN
CO
MP
O
NENT
IN1
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
Y
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
AU
DI
O
V
IDE
O
L
/
M
O
N
O
R
AV IN1
ANTENNA
/C
ABLE I
N
A
V IN 2
AUDIO
/
VIDEO
AUDIO / VIDEO
CO
MP
O
NENT IN 2
AU
DI
O
/
Y
P
B
P
R
IN 1 (ARC)
/
DV
I
IN 2
/
DV
I
I
N
3
/
DV
I
U
S
B IN
1
USB IN 2/USB Apps
H
/P
IN 1 (ARC)
/DVI
IN 2
/DVI
IN 3
/DVI
HDMI
AV IN 2
A
UDI
O
/
VIDE
O
CO
MP
O
NENT IN 2
AU
DI
O
/
Y
P
B
P
R
US
B IN
1
US
B IN
2
USB App
s
H
/P
IN 1
(
AR
C)
/
DVI
IN 2
/
DVI
IN
3
/
DVI
IN 1 (ARC)
/DVI
IN 2
/DVI
IN 3
/DVI
HDMI
AUDI
O
VIDE
O
L/MON
O
AV IN2
R
/
DVI I
N
1
(
AR
C)
2
3
4
US
B IN
1
U
S
B IN 2
/
U
S
B Apps
A
UDIO
VIDE
O
L/
M
O
N
O
R
AV IN1
CO
MP
O
N ENT I
N
ANTENNA
/C
ABLE IN
VIDEO
AU
DI
O
Y
2
1
L
P
B
P
R
R
R
S
-232
C
IN
(CO
NTR
O
L
&S
ERVI
C
E
)
O
PTI
C
AL
D
I
G
ITA
L
A
U
DI
O
OUT
W
IRELE
SS
CO
NTR
OL
RGB IN (PC)
LAN
REMOTE
CONTROL IN
A
UDIO I
N
(
R
G
B
/
DVI
)
HDMI
/DVI IN
1 (ARC) 2 3 4
LV3700 series
Other models
LK530, LK550 series
Plasma
105
ENG
ENGLISH
MAKING CONNECTIONS
DVI to HDMI Connection
Transmits the digital video signal from an external
device to the TV. Connect the external device and
the TV with the DVI-HDMI cable as shown in the
following illustration. To transmit an audio signal,
connect an audio cable.
AUDI
O
VIDEO
L/MON
O
AV IN2
R
/
DVI IN
1
(
AR
C)
2
3
4
US
B IN
1
U
S
B IN 2
/
U
S
B App
s
A
UDI
O
V
IDE
O
L/
M
O
N
O
R
AV IN1
CO
MP
O
N ENT I
N
ANTENNA
/C
ABLE IN
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
2
1
L
P
B
P
R
R
R
S
-232
C
IN
(CO
NTR
O
L
&S
ERVI
C
E
)
O
PTI
C
AL
D
I
G
ITA
L
A
U
DI
O
OUT
W
IRELE
SS
CO
NTR
OL
RGB IN (PC)
LAN
REMOTE
CO
NTR
O
L IN
A
UDIO I
N
(
R
G
B
/
DVI
)
AUDIO OUT
DVI OUT
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
/DVI IN
1 (ARC) 2 3 4
W
IRELE
SS
CO
NTR
O
L
RS-232C IN (CONTROL&SERVICE
)
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
IN1
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
AUDIO
VIDE
O
L
/MON
O
R
AV IN1
ꔡ
I
N 1
(
AR
C)
/
DV
I
I
N
2
/
DVI
I
N 3
/
DVI
IN
4
/
DVI
LAN
R
GB IN (PC
)
OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO
OUT
PTICAL
DIGIT
TICAL DIGIT
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE
IN
ANTENNA
ANTENNA
A
V IN 2
AUDIO / VIDEO
CO
MP
O
NENT IN 2
AUDIO / Y P
B
P
R
H
/
P
HDD I
N
US
B IN 1
U
SB A
pp
s
US
B IN 2
IN 1 (ARC)
/DVI
IN 2
/DVI
IN 3
/DVI
IN 4
/DVI
AUDIO OUT
DVI OUT
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
AV IN 2
AUDI
O
/
VIDE
O
CO
MP
O
NENT IN 2
A
UDI
O
/
Y
P
B
P
R
U
S
B IN
1
U
S
B IN
2
U
S
B App
s
H
/P
IN 1 (ARC
)
/
DVI
IN
2
/DVI
IN
3
/DVI
R
S
-232
C
IN
(CO
NTR
O
L
&S
ERVI
C
E
)
RGB IN (PC
)
OPTICAL DIGITA
L
AUDIO OU
T
AUDI
O
IN
(
R
G
B
/
DVI
)
LAN
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
IN
1
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
Y
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
AU
DI
O
V
IDE
O
L
/
M
O
N
O
R
AV IN1
A
NTENNA/CABLE IN
AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI)
IN 1 (ARC)
/DVI
IN 2
/DVI
IN 3
/DVI
AUDIO OUT DVI OUT
W
IRELE
SS
CO
NTROL
R
S
-232
C
IN
(CO
NTR
O
L
&S
ERVI
C
E
)
ꔡ
RGB IN (PC)
O
PTICAL DIGITA
L
AUDIO OU
T
AUDI
O
IN
(
R
G
B
/
DVI
)
L
AN
CO
MP
O
NENT
IN1
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
Y
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
AU
DI
O
V
IDE
O
L
/
M
O
N
O
R
AV IN1
A
NTENNA
/C
ABLE I
N
A
V IN 2
AUDIO
/
VIDEO
AUDIO / VIDEO
CO
MP
O
NENT IN 2
AU
DI
O
/
Y
P
B
P
R
IN 1 (ARC)
/
DV
I
IN 2
/
DV
I
I
N
3
/
DV
I
U
S
B IN 1
USB IN 2/USB Apps
H
/P
IN 1 (ARC)
/DVI
IN 2
/DVI
IN 3
/DVI
AUDIO OUT
DVI OUT
AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI)
LV3700 series
LK530, LK550 series
Other models
Plasma
106
ENG
ENGLISH
MAKING CONNECTIONS
AV IN 2
A
UDI
O
/
VIDE
O
CO
MP
O
NENT IN 2
AU
DI
O
/
Y
P
B
P
R
US
B IN
1
US
B IN
2
USB A
pps
H
/P
IN 1
(
AR
C)
/
DVI
IN 2
/
DVI
IN
3
/
DVI
COMPONENT IN 2
AUDIO / Y PB PR
VIDEO
AUDIO
WIRELE
SS
CO
NTR
OL
R
S
-232
C
IN
(CO
NTR
O
L
&S
ERVI
C
E
)
ꔡ
RGB IN (PC)
O
PTICAL DIGITA
L
AUDIO OU
T
AUDI
O
IN
(
R
G
B
/
DVI
)
L
AN
COMPONENT
IN1
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
Y
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
A
U
DI
O
VIDE
O
L
/
M
O
N
O
R
AV IN1
ANTENNA
/C
ABLE I
N
IN 1 (ARC)
/DV
I
IN 2
/DV
I
I
N
3
/DV
I
U
S
B IN 1
USB IN 2/USB Apps
H
/P
AV IN 2
AUDIO
/
VIDEO
AUDIO / VIDEO
COMPONENT IN 2
AUDIO / Y P
B
P
R
VIDEO
AUDIO
RS-232C IN (CONTROL&SERVICE)
R
G
B IN
(
P
C)
O
PTI
C
AL DI
G
ITA
L
A
U
DI
O
OUT
AUDI
O
IN
(
R
G
B
/
DVI
)
LAN
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
IN
1
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
Y
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
A
U
DI
O
VIDE
O
L
/
M
O
N
O
R
A
V IN1
A
NTENNA
/C
ABLE IN
COMPONENT
IN1
VIDEO
AUDIO
Y LP
B
P
R
R
VIDEO
AUDIO
WIRELE
SS
CO
NTR
OL
R
S
-232
C
IN
(CO
NTR
O
L
&S
ERVI
C
E
)
ꔡ
RGB IN (PC)
O
PTICAL DIGITA
L
AUDIO OU
T
AUDI
O
IN
(
R
G
B
/
DVI
)
L
AN
COMPONENT
IN1
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
Y
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
AU
DI
O
V
IDE
O
L
/
M
O
N
O
R
A
V IN
1
ANTENNA
/C
ABLE I
N
A
V IN 2
AUDIO
/
VIDEO
AUDIO / VIDEO
CO
MP
O
NENT IN 2
AU
DI
O
/
Y
P
B
P
R
IN 1 (ARC)
/DV
I
IN 2
/DV
I
I
N
3
/DV
I
U
S
B IN 1
USB IN 2/USB Apps
H
/P
COMPONENT
IN1
VIDEO
AUDIO
Y LP
B
P
R
R
VIDEO
AUDIO
Component Connection
Transmits the analog video and audio signals from
an external device to the TV. Connect the external
device and the TV with the component cable as
shown in the following illustration.
NOTE
If cables are installed incorrectly, it could
case the image to display in black and white
or with distorted color. Check to ensure the
cable are matched with the corresponding
color connection.
LV3700 series
LK530, LK550 series
AUDI
O
VIDE
O
L/MON
O
AV IN2
R
/
DVI I
N
1
(
AR
C)
2
3
4
US
B IN
1
U
S
B IN 2
/
U
S
B Apps
A
UDIO
V
IDE
O
L
/
M
O
N
O
R
AV IN1
CO
MP
O
N ENT I
N
ANTENNA
/C
ABLE IN
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
2
1
L
P
B
P
R
R
R
S
-232
C
IN
(CO
NTR
O
L
&S
ERVI
C
E
)
O
PTI
C
AL
D
I
G
ITA
L
A
U
DI
O
OUT
W
IRELE
SS
CO
NTR
OL
RGB IN (PC)
LAN
REMOTE
CO
NTR
O
L IN
A
UDIO I
N
(
R
G
B
/
DVI
)
VIDEO
AUDIO
COMPON ENT IN
VIDEO
AUDIO
Y
2
1
LP
B
P
R
R
Plasma
107
ENG
ENGLISH
MAKING CONNECTIONS
Composite Connection
Transmits the analog video and audio signals from
an external device to the TV. Connect the external
device and the TV with the composite cable as
shown in the following illustration.
NOTE
If you have a mono VCR, connect the audio
cable from the VCR to the AUDIO L/MONO
jack of the TV.
AUDI
O
VIDE
O
L/MON
O
AV IN2
R
/
DVI I
N
1
(
AR
C)
2
3
4
US
B IN
1
U
S
B IN 2
/
U
S
B Apps
A
UDIO
VIDE
O
L/
M
O
N
O
R
AV IN1
CO
MP
O
N ENT I
N
ANTENNA
/C
ABLE IN
VIDEO
AU
DI
O
Y
2
1
L
P
B
P
R
R
R
S
-232
C
IN
(CO
NTR
O
L
&S
ERVI
C
E
)
O
PTI
C
AL
D
I
G
ITA
L
A
U
DI
O
OUT
W
IRELE
SS
CO
NTR
OL
RGB IN (PC)
LAN
REMOTE
CONTROL IN
A
UDIO I
N
(
R
G
B
/
DVI
)
VIDEO AUDIO R
L (MONO)
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AV IN1
R
S-232C IN (CONTROL&SERVICE
)
RG
B IN
(
P
C)
O
PTI
C
AL DI
G
ITAL
AU
DI
O
OU
T
A
UDI
O
IN
(
R
G
B
/
DVI
)
L
A
N
CO
MP
O
NENT
IN1
V
IDE
O
A
UDIO
Y
Y
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
AUDIO
VIDE
O
L/MON
O
R
AV IN1
A
NTENNA
/C
ABLE I
N
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AV IN1
VIDEO AUDIO R
L (MONO)
AV IN 2
A
UDI
O
/
VIDE
O
CO
MP
O
NENT IN 2
AU
DI
O
/
Y
P
B
P
R
US
B IN
1
US
B IN
2
USB A
pps
H
/P
IN 1
(
AR
C)
/
DVI
IN 2
/
DVI
IN
3
/
DVI
VIDEO AUDIO R
L (MONO)
AV IN 2
AUDIO / VIDEO
W
IRELE
SS
CO
NTR
O
L
RS-232C IN (CONTROL&SERVICE
)
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
IN1
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
AUDI
O
VIDE
O
L
/MON
O
R
AV IN1
ꔡ
I
N 1
(
AR
C)
/
DVI
I
N
2
/
DVI
I
N 3
/
DVI
IN
4
/
DVI
LAN
R
GB IN (PC)
OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO
OUT
PTICAL
DIGIT
TICAL DIGIT
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE
IN
ANTENNA
ANTENNA
A
V IN 2
A
U
DI
O
/
VIDE
O
CO
MP
O
NENT IN 2
AU
DI
O
/
Y
P
B
P
R
H/P
HDD I
N
US
B IN 1
U
SB A
pp
s
US
B IN 2
COMPONENT
IN1
VIDEO
AUDIO
Y LP
B
P
R
R
VIDEO
AUDIO
W
IRELE
SS
CO
NTR
O
L
RS-232C IN (CONTROL&SERVICE
)
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
IN1
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
A
UDI
O
V
IDE
O
L
/MON
O
R
AV IN1
ꔡ
I
N 1
(
AR
C)
/
DV
I
I
N
2
/
DVI
I
N 3
/
DVI
IN
4
/
DVI
LAN
R
GB IN (PC)
OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO
OUT
PTICAL
DIGIT
TICAL DIGIT
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE
IN
ANTENNA
ANTENNA
H
/
P
H
DD IN
US
B IN
1
USB A
pps
US
B IN 2
VIDEO
AUDIO
A
V IN 2
AU
DI
O
/
VIDE
O
COMPONENT IN 2
AUDIO / Y PB PR
Other models
LK530, LK550 series
Plasma
108
ENG
ENGLISH
MAKING CONNECTIONS
W
IRELE
SS
CO
NTR
O
L
RS-232C IN (CONTROL&SERVICE
)
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
IN1
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
A
UDI
O
V
IDE
O
L
/MON
O
R
AV IN1
ꔡ
I
N 1
(
AR
C)
/
DVI
I
N
2
/
DVI
I
N 3
/
DVI
IN
4
/
DVI
LAN
R
GB IN (PC)
OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO
OUT
PTICAL
DIGIT
TICAL DIGIT
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE
IN
ANTENNA
ANTENNA
A
V IN 2
A
U
DI
O
/
VIDE
O
CO
MP
O
NENT IN 2
AU
DI
O
/
Y
P
B
P
R
H/P
H
DD I
N
US
B IN
1
USB A
pps
US
B IN 2
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AV IN1
VIDEO AUDIO R
L (MONO)
W
IRELE
SS
CO
NTR
O
L
RS-232C IN
(
CONTROL&SERVICE
)
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
IN1
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
AUDIO
VIDE
O
L
/MON
O
R
AV IN1
ꔡ
I
N 1
(
AR
C)
/
DV
I
I
N
2
/
DVI
I
N 3
/
DVI
IN
4
/
DVI
LAN
R
GB IN (PC)
OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO
OUT
PTICAL
DIGIT
TICAL DIGIT
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE
IN
ANTENNA
ANTENNA
P
R
H/P
HDD I
N
US
B IN 1
U
SB A
pp
s
US
B IN 2
VIDEO AUDIO R
L (MONO)
AV IN 2
AUDIO / VIDEO
N 2
N
2
N
2
N 2
COMPONENT IN
AU
DI
O
/
Y
P
B
P
P
P
P
R
R
R
WIRELE
SS
CO
NTR
OL
R
S
-232
C
IN
(CO
NTR
O
L
&S
ERVI
C
E
)
ꔡ
RGB IN (PC
)
O
PTICAL DIGITA
L
AUDIO OU
T
AUDI
O
IN
(
R
G
B
/
DVI
)
LAN
COMPONEN
T
IN1
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
Y
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
A
U
DI
O
VIDE
O
L
/
M
O
N
O
R
A
V IN
1
A
NTENNA
/C
ABLE IN
A
V IN 2
AUDIO
/
VIDEO
AUDIO / VIDEO
CO
MP
O
NENT IN 2
AUDIO / Y P
B
P
R
IN 1
(
ARC
)
/DV
I
IN 2
/DV
I
I
N
3
/DV
I
USB IN 1
USB IN 2/USB Apps
H/
P
AUDIO
VIDEO
L/MONO
R
AV IN1
VIDEO AUDIO R
L (MONO)
WIRELE
SS
CO
NTR
OL
R
S
-232
C
IN
(CO
NTR
O
L
&S
ERVI
C
E
)
ꔡ
RGB IN (PC)
O
PTICAL DIGITA
L
AUDIO OU
T
AUDI
O
IN
(
R
G
B
/
DVI
)
L
AN
COMPONENT
IN1
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
Y
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
AU
DI
O
V
IDE
O
L
/
M
O
N
O
R
AV IN1
ANTENNA
/C
ABLE I
N
A
V IN 2
IN 1 (ARC)
/D
V
I
IN 2
/DV
I
I
N
3
/DV
I
U
S
B IN 1
USB IN 2/USB Apps
H
/P
AV IN 2
AUDIO / VIDEO
CO
MP
O
NENT IN 2
AUDIO / Y P
B
P
R
VIDEO AUDIO R
L (MONO)
Other modelsLV3700 series
109
ENG
ENGLISH
MAKING CONNECTIONS
Connecting to a PC
NOTE
It is recommended to use the TV with the
HDMI connection for the best image quality.
HDMI Connection
Transmits the digital video and audio signals from
your PC to the TV. Connect the PC and the TV
with the HDMI cable as shown in the following
illustrations.
W
IRELE
SS
CO
NTR
O
L
RS-232C IN (CONTROL&SERVICE
)
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
IN1
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
AUDIO
VIDE
O
L
/MON
O
R
AV IN1
ꔡ
I
N 1
(
AR
C)
/
DV
I
I
N
2
/
DVI
I
N 3
/
DVI
IN
4
/
DVI
LAN
R
GB IN (PC
)
OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO
OUT
PTICAL
DIGIT
TICAL DIGIT
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE
IN
ANTENNA
ANTENNA
A
V IN 2
A
U
DI
O
/
VIDE
O
CO
MP
O
NENT IN 2
AUDIO / Y P
B
P
R
H
/
P
HDD I
N
US
B IN 1
U
SB A
pp
s
US
B IN 2
HDMI
IN 1 (ARC)
/DVI
IN 2
/DVI
IN 3
/DVI
IN 4
/DVI
W
IRELE
SS
CO
NTR
OL
R
S
-232
C
IN
(CO
NTR
O
L
&S
ERVI
C
E
)
ꔡ
RGB IN (PC)
O
PTICAL DIGITA
L
AUDIO OU
T
AUDI
O
IN
(
R
G
B
/
DVI
)
L
AN
CO
MP
O
NENT
IN1
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
Y
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
AU
DI
O
V
IDE
O
L
/
M
O
N
O
R
AV IN1
ANTENNA
/C
ABLE I
N
A
V IN 2
AUDIO
/
VIDEO
AUDIO / VIDEO
CO
MP
O
NENT IN 2
AU
DI
O
/
Y
P
B
P
R
IN 1 (ARC)
/
DV
I
IN 2
/
DV
I
I
N
3
/
DV
I
U
S
B IN
1
USB IN 2/USB Apps
H
/P
IN 1 (ARC)
/DVI
IN 2
/DVI
IN 3
/DVI
HDMI
AV IN 2
A
UDI
O
/
VIDE
O
CO
MP
O
NENT IN 2
AU
DI
O
/
Y
P
B
P
R
US
B IN
1
US
B IN
2
USB App
s
H
/P
IN 1
(
AR
C)
/
DVI
IN 2
/
DVI
IN
3
/
DVI
IN 1 (ARC)
/DVI
IN 2
/DVI
IN 3
/DVI
HDMI
AUDI
O
VIDE
O
L/MON
O
AV IN2
R
/
DVI I
N
1 (ARC)
2
3
4
US
B IN
1
U
S
B IN 2
/
U
S
B Apps
A
UDIO
VIDE
O
L/
M
O
N
O
R
AV IN1
CO
MP
O
N ENT I
N
ANTENNA
/C
ABLE IN
VIDEO
AU
DI
O
Y
2
1
L
P
B
P
R
R
R
S
-232
C
IN
(CO
NTR
O
L
&S
ERVI
C
E
)
O
PTI
C
AL
D
I
G
ITA
L
A
U
DI
O
OUT
W
IRELE
SS
CO
NTR
OL
RGB IN (PC)
LAN
REMOTE
CONTROL IN
A
UDIO I
N
(
R
G
B
/
DVI
)
HDMI
/DVI IN
1 (ARC) 2 3 4
LV3700 series
Other models
LK530, LK550 series
Plasma
110
ENG
ENGLISH
MAKING CONNECTIONS
DVI to HDMI Connection
Transmits the digital video signal from your PC to
the TV. Connect the PC and the TV with the DVI-
HDMI cable as shown in the following illustration.
To transmit an audio signal, connect an audio
cable.
AUDI
O
VIDEO
L/MON
O
AV IN2
R
/
DVI IN
1
(
AR
C)
2
3
4
US
B IN
1
U
S
B IN 2
/
U
S
B App
s
A
UDI
O
V
IDE
O
L/
M
O
N
O
R
AV IN1
CO
MP
O
N ENT I
N
ANTENNA
/C
ABLE IN
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
2
1
L
P
B
P
R
R
R
S
-232
C
IN
(CO
NTR
O
L
&S
ERVI
C
E
)
O
PTI
C
AL
D
I
G
ITA
L
A
U
DI
O
OUT
W
IRELE
SS
CO
NTR
OL
RGB IN (PC)
LAN
REMOTE
CO
NTR
O
L IN
A
UDIO I
N
(
R
G
B
/
DVI
)
AUDIO OUT
DVI OUT
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
/DVI IN
1 (ARC) 2 3 4
W
IRELE
SS
CO
NTR
O
L
RS-232C IN (CONTROL&SERVICE
)
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
IN1
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
AUDIO
VIDE
O
L
/MON
O
R
AV IN1
ꔡ
I
N 1
(
AR
C)
/
DV
I
I
N
2
/
DVI
I
N 3
/
DVI
IN
4
/
DVI
LAN
R
GB IN (PC
)
OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO
OUT
PTICAL
DIGIT
TICAL DIGIT
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE
IN
ANTENNA
ANTENNA
A
V IN 2
A
U
DI
O
/
VIDE
O
CO
MP
O
NENT IN 2
AU
DI
O
/
Y
P
B
P
R
H
/
P
HDD I
N
US
B IN 1
U
SB A
pp
s
US
B IN 2
IN 1 (ARC)
/DVI
IN 2
/DVI
IN 3
/DVI
IN 4
/DVI
AUDIO OUT
DVI OUT
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
AV IN 2
AUDI
O
/
VIDE
O
CO
MP
O
NENT IN 2
A
UDI
O
/
Y
P
B
P
R
U
S
B IN
1
U
S
B IN
2
U
S
B App
s
H
/P
IN 1 (ARC
)
/
DVI
IN
2
/DVI
IN
3
/DVI
R
S
-232
C
IN
(CO
NTR
O
L
&S
ERVI
C
E
)
RGB IN (PC
)
OPTICAL DIGITA
L
AUDIO OU
T
AUDI
O
IN
(
R
G
B
/
DVI
)
LAN
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
IN
1
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
Y
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
AU
DI
O
V
IDE
O
L
/
M
O
N
O
R
AV IN1
A
NTENNA/CABLE IN
AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI)
IN 1 (ARC)
/DVI
IN 2
/DVI
IN 3
/DVI
AUDIO OUT DVI OUT
W
IRELE
SS
CO
NTR
OL
RS-232C IN (CONTROL&SERVICE)
ꔡ
RGB IN (PC)
O
PTICAL DIGITA
L
AUDIO OU
T
AUDI
O
IN
(
R
G
B
/
DVI
)
L
AN
CO
MP
O
NENT
IN1
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
Y
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
AU
DI
O
V
IDE
O
L
/
M
O
N
O
R
AV IN1
A
NTENNA
/C
ABLE I
N
A
V IN 2
AUDIO
/
VIDEO
AUDIO / VIDEO
CO
MP
O
NENT IN 2
AU
DI
O
/
Y
P
B
P
R
IN 1 (ARC)
/
DV
I
IN 2
/
DV
I
I
N
3
/
DV
I
U
S
B IN 1
USB IN 2/USB Apps
H
/P
IN 1 (ARC)
/DVI
IN 2
/DVI
IN 3
/DVI
AUDIO OUT
DVI OUT
AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI)
LV3700 series
LK530, LK550 series
Other models
Plasma
111
ENG
ENGLISH
MAKING CONNECTIONS
W
IRELE
SS
CO
NTR
O
L
RS-232C IN (CONTROL&SERVICE
)
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
IN1
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
AUDIO
VIDE
O
L
/MON
O
R
AV IN1
ꔡ
I
N 1
(
AR
C)
/
DV
I
I
N
2
/
DVI
I
N 3
/
DVI
IN
4
/
DVI
LAN
R
GB IN (PC)
OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO
OUT
PTICAL
DIGIT
TICAL DIGIT
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE
IN
ANTENNA
ANTENNA
A
V IN 2
A
U
DI
O
/
VIDE
O
CO
MP
O
NENT IN 2
AU
DI
O
/
Y
P
B
P
R
H/P
HDD I
N
US
B IN 1
U
SB A
pp
s
US
B IN 2
RGB IN (PC) AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RGB OUT (PC)
AUDIO OUT
AUDI
O
VIDEO
L/MON
O
AV IN2
R
/
DVI IN
1
(
AR
C)
2
3
4
US
B IN
1
U
S
B IN 2
/
U
S
B App
s
A
UDIO
VIDE
O
L/
M
O
N
O
R
AV IN1
CO
MP
O
N ENT I
N
ANTENNA
/C
ABLE IN
VIDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
2
1
L
P
B
P
R
R
R
S
-232
C
IN
(CO
NTR
O
L
&S
ERVI
C
E
)
O
PTI
C
AL
D
I
G
ITA
L
A
U
DI
O
OUT
W
IRELE
SS
CO
NTR
OL
RGB IN (PC)
LAN
REMOTE
CONTROL IN
A
UDIO I
N
(
R
G
B
/
DVI
)
RGB OUT (PC)
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
RS-232C IN (CONTROL&SERVICE)
R
G
B IN
(
P
C)
O
PTI
C
AL DI
G
ITA
L
A
U
DI
O
OUT
AUDI
O
IN
(
R
G
B
/
DVI
)
LAN
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
IN
1
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
Y
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
A
U
DI
O
VIDE
O
L
/
M
O
N
O
R
AV IN1
A
NTENNA/CABLE IN
RGB OUT (PC)
AUDIO OUT
RGB IN (PC)
AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI)
WIRELE
SS
CO
NTR
OL
R
S
-232
C
IN
(CO
NTR
O
L
&S
ERVI
C
E
)
ꔡ
RGB IN (PC)
O
PTICAL DIGITA
L
AUDIO OU
T
AUDI
O
IN
(
R
G
B
/
DVI
)
L
AN
COMPONENT
IN1
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
Y
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
AU
DI
O
V
IDE
O
L
/
M
O
N
O
R
AV IN1
ANTENNA
/C
ABLE I
N
A
V IN 2
AUDIO
/
VIDEO
AUDIO / VIDEO
CO
MP
O
NENT IN 2
AU
DI
O
/
Y
P
B
P
R
IN 1 (ARC)
/DV
I
IN 2
/DV
I
I
N
3
/DV
I
U
S
B IN 1
USB IN 2/USB Apps
H
/P
RGB IN (PC)
AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI)
RGB OUT (PC)
AUDIO OUT
RGB Connection
Transmits the analog video signal from your PC to
the TV. Connect the PC and the TV with the D-sub
15 pin signal cable as shown in the following
illustrations. To transmit an audio signal, connect
an audio cable.
LV3700 series
LK530, LK550 series
Other models
Plasma
112
ENG
ENGLISH
MAKING CONNECTIONS
Connecting to an Audio
System
Use an optional external audio system instead of
the built-in speaker.
NOTE
If you use an optional external audio device
instead of the built-in speaker, set the TV
speaker feature to off (See p.94).
Digital Optical Audio Connection
Transmits the digital audio signal from the TV to an
external device. Connect the external device and
the TV with the optical audio cable as shown in
the following illustration.
NOTE
Do not look into the optical output port.
Looking at the laser beam may damage your
vision.
Audio with ACP (Audio Copy Protection)
function may block digital audio output.
NOTE
1920 x 1080 is the recommended PC
resolution. If you use the TV in other video
modes, afterimages or distorted images may
appear on the screen.
Depending on the graphics card, DOS mode
may not work if a HDMI to DVI Cable is in
use.
In PC mode, there may be noise associated
with the resolution, vertical pattern, contrast
or brightness. If noise is present, change
the PC output to another resolution, change
the refresh rate to another rate or adjust the
brightness and contrast on the PICTURE
menu until the picture is clear.
The synchronization input form for Horizontal
and Vertical frequencies is separate.
Depending on the graphics card, some
resolution settings may not allow the image
to be positioned on the screen properly.
If you experience overscan issues when
using HDMI-PC 1920x1080, change aspect
ratio to Just scan.
When selecting HDMI-PC, set the “Input
Label - PC” in the INPUT menu.
AUDI
O
VIDE
O
L/MON
O
AV IN2
R
/
DVI I
N
1
(
AR
C)
2
3
4
US
B IN
1
U
S
B IN 2
/
U
S
B Apps
A
UDI
O
V
IDE
O
L/
M
O
N
O
R
AV IN1
CO
MP
O
N ENT IN
ANTENNA
/C
ABLE IN
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
2
1
L
P
B
P
R
R
R
S
-232
C
IN
(CO
NTR
O
L
&S
ERVI
C
E
)
O
PTI
C
AL
D
I
G
ITA
L
A
U
DI
O
OUT
W
IRELE
SS
CO
NTR
OL
RGB IN (PC)
LAN
REMOTE
CONTROL IN
A
UDIO I
N
(
R
G
B
/
DVI
)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
OPTICAL
AUDIO IN
Plasma
113
ENG
ENGLISH
MAKING CONNECTIONS
W
IRELE
SS
CO
NTR
O
L
RS-232C IN (CONTROL&SERVICE
)
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
IN1
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
AUDIO
VIDE
O
L
/MON
O
R
AV IN1
ꔡ
I
N 1
(
AR
C)
/
DVI
I
N
2
/
DVI
I
N 3
/
DVI
IN
4
/
DVI
LAN
R
GB IN (PC)
OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO
OUT
PTICAL
DIGIT
TICAL DIGIT
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE
IN
ANTENNA
ANTENNA
A
V IN 2
A
U
DI
O
/
VIDE
O
CO
MP
O
NENT IN 2
AU
DI
O
/
Y
P
B
P
R
H
/
P
HDD I
N
US
B IN 1
U
SB A
pp
s
US
B IN 2
OPTICAL
AUDIO IN
OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
R
S-232C IN (CONTROL&SERVICE)
RG
B IN
(
P
C)
O
PTI
C
AL DI
G
ITAL
AU
DI
O
OU
T
A
UDI
O
IN
(
R
G
B
/
DVI
)
LA
N
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
I
N
1
V
IDE
O
A
UDIO
Y
Y
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
A
UDIO
V
IDE
O
L
/MON
O
R
A
V IN
1
A
NTENNA
/C
ABLE IN
OPTICAL
AUDIO IN
OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
WIRELE
SS
CO
NTR
OL
R
S
-232
C
IN
(CO
NTR
O
L
&S
ERVI
C
E
)
ꔡ
RGB IN (PC)
O
PTICAL DIGITA
L
AUDIO OU
T
AUDI
O
IN
(
R
G
B
/
DVI
)
L
AN
COMPONENT
IN1
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
Y
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
AU
DI
O
V
IDE
O
L
/
M
O
N
O
R
AV IN1
A
NTENNA
/C
ABLE IN
A
V IN 2
AUDIO
/
VIDEO
AUDIO / VIDEO
CO
MP
O
NENT IN 2
AUDIO / Y P
B
P
R
IN 1 (ARC)
/DV
I
IN 2
/DV
I
I
N
3
/DV
I
U
S
B IN 1
USB IN 2/USB Apps
H
/P
OPTICAL
AUDIO IN
OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
Other models
LV3700 series
LK530, LK550 series
114
ENG
ENGLISH
MAKING CONNECTIONS
Connecting to a USB
Connect a USB storage device such as a USB
flash memory, external hard drive, or a USB
memory card reader to the TV and access the
Smart Share menu to use various multimedia files.
See “Connecting USB storage devices” on page 64
and see “Browsing files” on page 69.
Connecting to a Headphone
(
LCD
)
Listen to the sound through a headphone.
W
IRELE
SS
CO
NTR
O
L
RS-232C IN (CONTROL&SERVICE
)
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
IN1
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
AUDIO
VIDE
O
L
/MON
O
R
AV IN1
ꔡ
I
N 1
(
AR
C)
/
DVI
I
N
2
/
DVI
I
N 3
/
DVI
IN
4
/
DVI
LAN
R
GB IN (PC)
OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO
OUT
PTICAL
DIGIT
TICAL DIGIT
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
AUDIO
INAUDIO IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE
IN
ANTENNAANTENNA
A
V IN 2
A
U
DI
O
/
VIDE
O
CO
MP
O
NENT IN 2
AU
DI
O
/
Y
P
B
P
R
H/P
HDD I
N
US
B IN 1
U
SB A
pp
s
US
B IN 2
HDD IN
USB IN 1 USB Apps
USB IN 2
W
IRELE
SS
CO
NTR
O
L
RS-232C IN (CONTROL&SERVICE
)
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
IN1
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
A
UDI
O
V
IDE
O
L
/MON
O
R
AV IN1
ꔡ
I
N 1
(
AR
C)
/
DVI
I
N
2
/
DVI
I
N 3
/
DVI
IN
4
/
DVI
LAN
R
GB IN (PC)
OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO
OUT
PTICAL
DIGIT
TICAL DIGIT
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
AUDIO
INAUDIO IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE
IN
ANTENNA
ANTENNA
A
V IN 2
AUDIO / VIDEO
CO
MP
O
NENT IN 2
AU
DI
O
/
Y
P
B
P
R
H/P
H
DD I
N
US
B IN
1
USB A
pps
US
B IN 2
H/P
i.e)
i.e)
NOTE
AUDIO menu options are disabled when
connecting a headphone.
When changing AV MODE with a headphone
connected, the change is applied to video
but not to audio.
Optical Digital Audio Out is not available
when connecting a headphone.
Headphone impedance: 16 Ω
Max audio output: 10 mW to 15 mW
Headphone jack size: 0.35 cm (0.13 inch)
115
ENG
ENGLISH
MAKING CONNECTIONS
Connecting the Wireless
Media Box
(Not support for LK530 and LK550 series)
LG TVs with a Wireless Control port support the
LG Wireless Media Box, which is sold separately.
When you connect the wireless ready dongle
(included with the media box) to the TV, external
devices can be connected to the LG Wireless
Media Box and video and audio will be sent to the
TV wirelessly.
Refer to the Wireless Media Box manual for
operating instructions.
NOTE
When using the external device connected
to the Wireless Media Box, some functions
of the TV menu may not work.
W
IRELE
SS
CO
NTR
O
L
RS-232C IN (CONTROL&SERVICE
)
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
IN1
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
A
UDI
O
V
IDE
O
L
/MON
O
R
AV IN1
ꔡ
I
N 1
(
AR
C)
/
DVI
I
N
2
/
DVI
I
N 3
/
DVI
IN
4
/
DVI
LAN
R
GB IN (PC)
OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO
OUT
PTICAL
DIGIT
TICAL DIGIT
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO IN
ANTENNA/
CABLE
IN
ANTENNA
ANTENNA
AV IN 2
A
U
DI
O
/
VIDE
O
CO
MP
O
NENT IN 2
AU
DI
O
/
Y
P
B
P
R
H/P
HDD I
N
US
B IN 1 USB A
pps
US
B IN 2
HDMI OUT
WIRELESS
CONTROL
WIRELESS
CONTROL
ꔡ
IN 1 (ARC)
/DVI
IN 2
/DVI
IN 3
/DVI
IN 4
/DVI
WIRELE
SS
CO
NTR
OL
RS-232C IN (CONTROL&SERVICE)
ꔡ
RGB IN (PC)
O
PTICAL DIGITA
L
AUDIO OU
T
AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI)
L
AN
COMPONENT
IN1
V
IDE
O
AUDIO
Y
Y
Y
L
P
B
P
R
R
A
U
DI
O
VIDE
O
L
/
M
O
N
O
R
A
V IN
1
ANTENNA
/C
ABLE I
N
A
V IN 2
AUDIO
/
VIDEO
AUDIO / VIDEO
CO
MP
O
NENT IN 2
AU
DI
O
/
Y
P
B
P
R
IN 1 (ARC)
/DV
I
IN 2
/DV
I
I
N
3
/DV
I
U
S
B IN 1
USB IN 2/USB Apps
H
/P
IN 1 (ARC)
/DVI
IN 2
/DVI
IN 3
/DVI
HDMI OUT
WIRELESS
CONTROL
WIRELESS
CONTROL
ꔡ
AUDI
O
VIDE
O
L/MON
O
AV IN2
R
/
DVI I
N
1 (ARC)
2
3
4
US
B IN
1
U
S
B IN 2
/
U
S
B Apps
A
UDI
O
V
IDE
O
L/
M
O
N
O
R
AV IN1
CO
MP
O
N ENT I
N
ANTENNA
/C
ABLE IN
V
IDE
O
AU
DI
O
Y
2
1
L
P
B
P
R
R
R
S
-232
C
IN
(CO
NTR
O
L
&S
ERVI
C
E
)
O
PTI
C
AL
D
I
G
ITA
L
A
U
DI
O
OUT
W
IRELE
SS
CO
NTR
OL
RGB IN (PC)
LAN
REMOTE
CO
NTR
O
L IN
A
UDIO I
N
(
R
G
B
/
DVI
)
HDMI OUT
WIRELESS
CONTROL
WIRELESS
CONTROL
/DVI IN
1 (ARC) 2 3 4
Other models
LV3700 series
Plasma
116
ENG
ENGLISH
MAKING CONNECTIONS
SIMPLINK Connection
Use the TV remote control to play and control the
AV device connected with the HDMI cable through
HDMI-CEC. This TV may work with the devices
that support HDMI-CEC, but only devices with the
logo are fully supported.
Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI/
DVI IN or HDMI IN terminal on the rear of the TV
and the other end to the SIMPLINK device.
NOTE
If the connected device does not support
HDMI-CEC, the SIMPLINK feature is
unavailable.
To operate SIMPLINK, you should use
an High Speed HDMI cable with the CEC
(Consumer Electronics Control) function.
SIMPLINK may not work properly if you a
third-party device that has an HDMI-CEC
function.
Activating and Using the
SIMPLINK menus
1 Press SIMPINK to access the SIMPLINK
menus.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to select to On.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to one of
the devices and press ENTER.
1
2
3
4
5
No. Description
1Displays the previously viewed TV channel.
2Plays discs. When multiple discs are
available, the title of the disc appears at the
bottom of the screen.
3Controls the connected VCR.
4HDD recordings playback: Controls the
recording stored in HDD.
5Audio out to home theater speaker or Audio
out to TV: Changes the audio output between
Home theater speaker and TV speaker.
- A check mark appears in front of the selected
device.
- Available devices display in a bright color.
- Unavailable devices display in grey.
3 Control the selected AV device.
Function Description
Direct Play
After connecting AV devices to
the TV, you can directly control the
devices and play media without
additional settings.
Select AV
device
Enables you to select one of the AV
devices connected to the TV.
Disc playback
Control connected AV devices by
pressing the Navigation buttons,
ENTER, , , , and .
Power off all
devices
When you power off the TV, all
connected devices are turned off.
Sync Power
on
When the equipment with
SIMPLINK function connected HDMI
terminal starts to play, the TV will
automatically turn on.
Switch audio-
out
Offers an easy way to switch audio-
out.
NOTE
If you change the input source by pressing
INPUT, the progressing function of the
SIMPLINK device will stop.
If you select a device that has the
home theater feature, the sound output
automatically switches to the home theater
speaker and the TV speaker turns off.
If a connected SIMPLINK home theater
system does not play the audio from the TV,
connect the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal
on the rear of the TV to the DIGITAL AUDIO
IN terminal on the back of the SIMPLINK
device with an optical cable.
117
ENG
ENGLISH
MAKING CONNECTIONS
MAINTENANCE
Update and clean your TV regularly to keep the
best performance and to extend the product
lifespan.
Updating the TV Firmware
Download and install the latest firmware by
connecting to the firmware update server to
enhance or change the product function, or add
new features.
The firmware update may not work properly
depending on the Internet environment. If so, you
may obtain the latest firmware update from the
authorized LG Electronics service center.
To check the current firmware version or update
the firmware,
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press ENTER.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SUPPORT and press ENTER.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
Software Update and press ENTER.
The current firmware version displays.
5 Select Check Update Version to check a new
firmware version manually.
NSU (Network Software Update):
When software update is on, the TV will
automatically check for software updates.
A pop-up window will appear on the screen
when an update is available.
NOTE
While updating the firmware, do not
disconnect the LAN cable, turn the TV off, or
unplug the power cord.
Premium service is disabled while the
software is being updated through NSU.
6 When the update is complete, the TV will
automatically restart in 5 seconds.
You may need to reset some CHANNEL,
PICTURE, or AUDIO menus.
NOTE
You cannot downgrade back to an older
firmware version.
The period of time for the firmware update
may be different depending on the firmware
size or network condition.
If the firmware update download fails when
using wireless, temporarily connect a cable
directly to your router. If it still does not
download, contact customer service.
118
ENG
ENGLISH
MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Your TV
CAUTION
Make sure to turn the power off and
disconnect the power cord and all other
cables first.
When the TV is left unattended and unused
for a long time, disconnect the power cord
from the wall outlet to prevent possible
damage from lightning or power surges.
Screen and frame
To remove dust or light dirt, wipe the surface with
a dry, clean, and soft cloth.
To remove major dirt, wipe the surface with a
soft cloth dampened in clean water or a diluted
mild detergent. Then wipe immediately with a dry
cloth.
CAUTION
Do not push, rub, or hit the surface with
your fingernail or a sharp object, as this may
result in scratches on the screen and image
distortions.
Do not use any chemicals, such as waxes,
benzene, alcohol, thinners, insecticides, air
fresheners, lubricants, as these may damage
the screen’s finish and cause discoloration.
Cabinet and stand
To remove dust or light dirt, wipe the cabinet with
a dry, clean, and soft cloth.
To remove major dirt, wipe the cabinet with a
soft cloth dampened in a clean water or water
containing a small amount of mild detergent. Then
wipe immediately with a dry cloth.
CAUTION
Do not spray liquid onto the surface. If water
enters the TV, it may result in fire, electric
shock, or malfunction.
Do not use any chemicals as this may
deteriorate the surface.
Power cord
Remove the accumulated dust or dirt on the
power cord regularly.
Preventing “Image burn” or
“Burn-in” on your TV screen
If a fixed image displays on the TV screen for
a long period of time, it will be imprinted and
become a permanent disfigurement on the
screen. This is “image burn” or “burn-in” and
not covered by the warranty.
If the aspect ratio of the TV is set to 4:3 for a
long period of time, image burn may occur on
the letterboxed area of the screen.
Avoid displaying a fixed image on the TV screen
for a long period of time (2 or more hours for
LCD, 1 or more hours for the Plasma TV) to
prevent image burn.
119
ENG
ENGLISH
MAINTENANCE
TROUBLESHOOTING
General
Problem Resolution
Cannot control the TV with the
remote control.
Check the remote control sensor on the product and try again.
Check if there is any obstacle between the product and the remote control.
Check if the batteries are still working and properly installed ( to , to ).
Check if the appropriate input mode such as TV or VCR is set for using the
remote control.
No image display and no sound is
produced.
Check if the product is turned on.
Check if the power cord is connected to a wall outlet.
Check if there is a problem in the wall outlet by connecting other products.
Image appears slowly when the TV
turns on.
The image is muted during the product startup process. This is normal. If the
image does not appear in a few minutes, unplug the TV for 30 seconds and try
again. If the image still does not appear, contact the authorized service center
in your local area.
Cannot connect external devices. Refer to the “Connection overview” and connect an external device.
The TV turns off suddenly. Check the power control settings. The power supply may be interrupted.
Check if the Auto sleep feature is activated in the Time settings.
Refer to the “Sleep Timer”.
If there is no signal while the TV is on, the TV will turn off automatically after
15 minutes of inactivity.
Audio
Problem Resolution
No sound is produced while images
are displaying.
Press VOL + or - button.
Check if the sound is muted by pressing MUTE.
Scroll to other channels. There may a problem with the broadcast.
Check if the audio cables are connected properly.
Check if the TV Speaker feature is activated in the menu option.
No output from one of the speakers Adjust Balance in the menu option.
Unusual sound from inside the TV is
produced.
A change in ambient humidity or temperature may result in an unusual noise
when the product turns on or off. There is no problem with your product.
120
ENG
ENGLISH
TROUBLESHOOTING
Video
Problem Resolution
An image displays in black and
white or the color quality is poor.
Adjust the color setting in the menu option.
Keep a sufficient distance between this product and other electronic products.
Scroll to other channels. There may a problem with the broadcast.
Horizontal or vertical bars appears
or images blur
Check if there are local interferences such as an electrical appliance or power
tool.
Lines or streaks appear on images Check the antenna or aim the antenna to the proper direction.
Afterimages (ghosts) appear when
the product turns off
Pixels may have been damaged from a fixed image displayed for a long time
(image burn). Use a screen saver to prevent the pixel damage on the screen.
The power is on but the screen
appears extremely dark.
Adjust the brightness and contrast in the menu option.
“No Signal” appears on the screen. Check if the signal cable is connected between the TV and products properly.
Check the selected input source by pressing INPUT.
Black spots appear on the screen. Several pixels in red, green, white, or black may appear on the screen that can
attribute to the characteristics of the LCD panel.
This is normal.
The display offset is wrong. Adjust the position setting in the Picture menu.
Check if the video card resolution and frequency are supported by the product.
If the frequency is out of range, set to the recommended resolution using the
display settings on the external device.
Thin lines appear in the background
of the screen.
Check the video cable connections.
Horizontal noises appear or
characters blur.
Adjust the Phase setting in the menu option.
Refer to the “SCREEN (RGB-PC)”.
The reception on some channels is
poor
Scroll to other channels. There may a problem with the broadcast.
The station signal may be weak. Aim the antenna to the proper direction.
Check if there is local interference such as an electrical appliance or power
tool.
Movie
Problem Resolution
The file does not appear on the
Movie List.
Check whether the extension is supported.
Message is displayed
saying “This file is invalid” or the
audio is working normally but the
video is not working normally.
Check whether the file is playing normally on a PC. (Check whether the file is
damaged.)
Check whether the resolution is supported.
Check whether the video/audio codec is supported.
Check whether the frame rate is supported.
Message is displayed saying
“Unsupported Audio” or the video
is working normally but the audio is
not working normally.
Check whether the file is playing normally on a PC. (Check whether the file is
damaged.)
Check whether the audio codec is supported.
Check whether the bit rate is supported.
Check whether the sample rate is supported.
Subtitle is not working. Check whether the file is playing normally on a PC. (Check whether the file is
damaged.)
Check whether the video file and subtitle file name are the same.
Check whether the video file and subtitle file are located in the same folder.
Check whether the subtitle file is supported.
Check whether the language is supported. (When you open the subtitle file in
Memo Pad, you can check the language of the subtitle file.)
121
ENG
ENGLISH
TROUBLESHOOTING
SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications may be changed without prior notice due to upgrade of product functions.
MODELS
50PZ950
(50PZ950-UA)
60PZ950
(60PZ950-UA)
50PZ950U
(50PZ950U-UA)
60PZ950U
(60PZ950U-UA)
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
With stand 1175.2 mm x 787.6 mm x 317.2 mm
(46.2 inch x 31.0 inch x 12.4 inch)
1393.4 mm x 916.4 mm x 364.4 mm
(54.8 inch x 36.0 inch x 14.3 inch)
Without stand 1175.2 mm x 720.6 mm x 49.6 mm
(46.2 inch x 28.3 inch x 1.9 inch)
1393.4 mm x 843.8 mm x 49.6 mm
(54.8 inch x 33.2 inch x 1.9 inch)
Weight With stand 32.5 kg (71.6 lb) 46.3 kg (102.0 lb)
Without stand 28.9 kg (63.7 lb) 40.3 kg (88.8 lb)
Current Value / Power consumption 3.7 A / 370 W 5.3 A / 530 W
Power requirement AC 100 - 240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz
MODELS 50PZ750
(50PZ750-UG)
60PZ750
(60PZ750-UG)
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
With stand 1185.2 mm x 782.6 mm x 317.2 mm
(46.6 inch x 30.8 inch x 12.4 inch)
1404.0 mm x 911.4 mm x 364.4 mm
(55.2 inch x 35.8 inch x 14.3 inch)
Without stand 1185.2 mm x 714.0 mm x 49.6 mm
(46.6 inch x 28.1 inch x 1.9 inch)
1404.0 mm x 837.8 mm x 49.6 mm
(55.2 inch x 32.9 inch x 1.9 inch)
Weight With stand 31.5 kg (69.4 lb) 46.3 kg (102.0 lb)
Without stand 27.9 kg (61.5 lb) 40.3 kg (88.8 lb)
Current Value / Power consumption 3.7 A / 370 W 5.3 A / 530 W
Power requirement AC 100 - 240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz
Television System NTSC-M, ATSC, 64 & 256 QAM
Program Coverage VHF 2-13, UHF 14-69, CATV 1-135, DTV 2-69, CADTV 1-135
External Antenna Impedance 75 Ω
Environment
condition
Operating
Temperature
0 - 40°C
Operating Humidity Less than 80%
Storage Temperature -20 - 60°C
Storage Humidity Less than 85%
122
ENG
ENGLISH
SPECIFICATIONS
MODELS 42LV3700
(42LV3700-UD)
47LV3700
(47LV3700-UD)
55LV3700
(55LV3700-UD)
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
With stand 998.0 mm x 684.0 mm
x 256.0 mm
(39.2 inch x 26.9 inch x
10.0 inch)
1108.0 mm x 746.0 mm
x 256.0 mm
(43.6 inch x 29.3 inch x
10.0 inch)
1286.0 mm x 847.0 mm
x 338.0 mm
(50.6 inch x 33.3 inch x
13.3 inch)
Without stand 998.0 mm x 615.0 mm
x 30.4 mm
(39.2 inch x 24.2 inch x
1.1 inch)
1108.0 mm x 677.0 mm
x 30.4 mm
(43.6 inch x 26.6 inch x
1.1 inch)
1286.0 mm x 778.0 mm
x 30.4 mm
(50.6 inch x 30.6 inch x
1.1 inch)
Weight With stand 15.5 kg (34.1 lb) 20.9 kg (46.0 lb) 25.5 kg (56.2 lb)
Without stand 13.3 kg (29.3 lb) 18.7 kg (41.2 lb) 21.4 kg (47.1 lb)
Current Value / Power consumption Philippines
: 1.3 A / 130 W
Other Country
: 1.1 A / 110 W
1.4 A / 140 W 1.6 A / 160 W
Power requirement USA, Canada, Mexico: AC 120 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz
Other Country: AC 100 - 240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz
MODELS
42LV5400
(42LV5400-UB)
47LV5400
(47LV5400-UB)
55LV5400
(55LV5400-UB)
42LV5500
(42LV5500-UA)
(42LV5500-UG)
47LV5500
(47LV5500-UA)
55LV5500
(55LV5500-UA)
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
With stand 1012.0 mm x 683.0 mm
x 256.0 mm
(39.8 inch x 26.8 inch x
10.0 inch)
1121.0 mm x 746.0 mm
x 256.0 mm
(44.1 inch x 29.3 inch x
10.0 inch)
1298.0 mm x 849.0 mm
x 338.0 mm
(51.1 inch x 33.4 inch x
13.3 inch)
Without stand 1012.0 mm x 617.0 mm
x 29.9 mm
(39.8 inch x 24.2 inch x
1.1 inch)
1121.0 mm x 678.0 mm
x 29.9 mm
(44.1 inch x 26.6 inch x
1.1 inch)
1298.0 mm x 778.0 mm
x 29.9 mm
(51.1 inch x 30.6 inch x
1.1 inch)
Weight With stand 15.5 kg (34.1 lb) 20.7 kg (45.6 lb) 25.8 kg (56.8 lb)
Without stand 13.2 kg (29.1 lb) 18.4 kg (40.5 lb) 21.7 kg (47.8 lb)
Current Value / Power consumption 1.4 A / 140 W 1.5 A / 150 W 1.7 A / 170 W
Power requirement USA, Canada, Mexico: AC 120 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz
Other Country: AC 100 - 240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz
MODELS 42LW5600
(42LW5600-UA)
47LW5600
(47LW5600-UA)
55LW5600
(55LW5600-UA)
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
With stand 1005.0 mm x 688.0 mm
x 256.0 mm
(39.5 inch x 27.0 inch x
10.0 inch)
1115.0 mm x 750.0 mm
x 256.0 mm
(43.8 inch x 29.5 inch x
10.0 inch)
1293.0 mm x 851.0 mm
x 338.0 mm
(50.9 inch x 33.5 inch x
13.3 inch)
Without stand 1005.0 mm x 621.0 mm
x 29.9 mm
(39.5 inch x 24.4 inch x
1.1 inch)
1115.0 mm x 683.0 mm
x 29.9 mm
(43.8 inch x 26.8 inch x
1.1 inch)
1293.0 mm x 785.0 mm
x 29.9 mm
(50.9 inch x 30.9 inch x
1.1 inch)
Weight With stand 15.2 kg (33.5 lb) 20.7 kg (45.6 lb) 26.2 kg (57.7 lb)
Without stand 13.0 kg (28.6 lb) 18.5 kg (40.7 lb) 22.0 kg (48.5 lb)
Current Value / Power consumption 1.4 A / 140 W 1.5 A / 150 W 1.7 A / 170 W
Power requirement USA, Canada, Mexico: AC 120 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz
Other Country: AC 100 - 240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz
123
ENG
ENGLISH
SPECIFICATIONS
MODELS 47LW6500
(47LW6500-UA)
55LW6500
(55LW6500-UA)
65LW6500
(65LW6500-UA)
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
With stand 1119.0 mm x 749.0 mm
x 255.0 mm
(44.0 inch x 29.4 inch x
10.0 inch)
1297.0 mm x 851.0 mm
x 341.0 mm
(51.0 inch x 33.5 inch x
13.4 inch)
1555.0 mm x 1012.0 x
341.0 mm
(61.2 inch x 39.8 inch x
13.4 inch)
Without stand 1119.0 mm x 684.0 mm
x 29.9 mm
(44.0 inch x 26.9 inch x
1.1 inch)
1297.0 mm x 785.0 mm
x 29.9 mm
(51.0 inch x 30.9 inch x
1.1 inch)
1555.0 mm x 940.0 mm
x 38.1 mm
(61.2 inch x 37.0 inch x
1.5 inch)
Weight With stand 21.0 kg (46.2 lb) 27.0 kg (59.5 lb) 49.0 kg (108.0 lb)
Without stand 18.2 kg (40.1 lb) 22.0 kg (48.5 lb) 42.0 kg (92.5 lb)
Current Value / Power consumption 1.5 A / 150 W 1.7 A / 170W 2.4 A / 240 W
Power requirement USA, Canada, Mexico: AC 120 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz
Other Country: AC 100 - 240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz
MODELS 47LW5700
(47LW5700-UE)
55LW5700
(55LW5700-UE)
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
With stand 1109.0 mm x 744.0 mm x 255.0 mm
(43.6 inch x 29.2 inch x 10.0 inch)
1286.0 mm x 848.0 mm x 338.0 mm
(50.6 inch x 33.3 inch x 13.3 inch)
Without stand 1109.0 mm x 684.0 mm x 30.9 mm
(43.6 inch x 26.9 inch x 1.2 inch)
1286.0 mm x 784.0 mm x 30.9 mm
(50.6 inch x 30.8 inch x 1.2 inch)
Weight With stand 20.2 kg (44.5 lb) 26.2 kg (57.7 lb)
Without stand 17.9 kg (39.4 lb) 22.1 kg (48.7 lb)
Current Value / Power consumption 1.5 A / 150 W 1.7 A / 170 W
Power requirement USA, Canada, Mexico: AC 120 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz
Other Country: AC 100 - 240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz
MODELS 32LW5700
(32LW5700-UE)
42LW5700
(42LW5700-UE)
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
With stand 766.0 mm x 545.0 mm x 240.0 mm
(30.1 inch x 21.4 inch x 9.4 inch)
999.0 mm x 681.0 mm x 255.0 mm
(39.3 inch x 26.8 inch x 10.0 inch)
Without stand 766.0 mm x 491.0 mm x 41.0 mm
(30.1 inch x 19.3 inch x 1.6 inch)
999.0 mm x 623.0 mm x 30.9 mm
(39.3 inch x 24.5 inch x 1.2 inch)
Weight With stand 10.7 kg (23.5 lb) 15.7 kg (34.6 lb)
Without stand 8.9 kg (19.6 lb) 13.4 kg (29.5 lb)
Current Value / Power consumption 1.2A / 120 W 1.4 A / 140 W
Power requirement USA, Canada, Mexico: AC 120 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz
Other Country: AC 100 - 240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz
124
ENG
ENGLISH
SPECIFICATIONS
MODELS 42LK530
(42LK530-UC)
47LK530
(47LK530-UC)
55LK530
(55LK530-UC)
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
With stand 1024.0 mm x 685.0 mm
x 261.0 mm
(40.3 inch x 26.9 x 10.2
inch)
1137.0 mm x 758.0 mm
x 270.0 mm
(44.7 inch x 29.8 inch x
10.6 inch)
1329.0 mm x 872.0 mm
x 330.0 mm
(52.3 inch x 34.3 inch x
12.9 inch)
Without stand 1024.0 mm x 621.0 mm
x 76.8 mm
(40.3 inch x 24.4 inch x
3.0 inch)
1137.0 mm x 685.0 mm
x 76.8 mm
(44.7 inch x 26.9 inch x
3.0 inch)
1329.0 mm x 796.0 mm
x 96.5 mm
(52.3 inch x 31.3 inch x
3.7 inch)
Weight With stand 15.5 kg (34.1 lb) 20.3 kg (44.7 lb) 33.0 kg (72.7 lb)
Without stand 13.9 kg (30.6 lb) 18.3 kg (40.3 lb) 29.8 kg (65.6 lb)
Current Value / Power consumption 2.0 A / 200 W 2.5 A / 250 W 3.2 A / 320 W
Power requirement AC 100 - 240V ~ 50 / 60 Hz
MODELS 47LW9800
(47LW9800-UA)
55LW9800
(55LW9800-UA)
55LV9500
(55LV9500-UA)
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
With stand 1095.0 mm x 735.0 mm x 235.0 mm
(43.1 inch x 28.9 inch x 9.2 inch)
1265.0 mm x 831.0 mm x 285.0 mm
(49.8 inch x 32.7 inch x 11.2 inch)
Without stand 1095.0 mm x 665.0 mm x 27.5 mm
(43.1 inch x 26.1 inch x 1.0 inch)
1265.0 mm x 760.0 mm x 27.5 mm
(49.8 inch x 29.9 inch x 1.0 inch)
Weight With stand 22.5 kg (49.6 lb) 29.0 kg (63.9 lb)
Without stand 18.2 kg (40.1 lb) 23.8 kg (52.4 lb)
Current Value / Power consumption 2.1 A / 210 W 2.5 A / 250 W
Power requirement USA, Canada, Mexico: AC 120 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz
Other Country: AC 100 - 240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz
MODELS
42LK550
(42LK550-UA)
(42LK550-UG)
47LK550
(47LK550-UA)
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
With stand 1019.0 mm x 698.0 mm x 265.0 mm
(40.1 inch x 27.4 inch x 10.4 inch)
1132.0 mm x 762.0 mm x 265.0 mm
(44.5 inch x 30.0 inch x 10.4 inch)
Without stand 1019.0 mm x 631.0 mm x 76.5 mm
(40.1 inch x 24.8 inch x 3.0 inch)
1132.0 mm x 695.0 mm x 76.5 mm
(44.5 inch x 27.3 inch x 3.0 inch)
Weight With stand 16.2 kg (35.7 lb) 19.0 kg (41.8 lb)
Without stand 14.5 kg (31.9 lb) 17.3 kg (38.1 lb)
Current Value / Power consumption 1.9 A / 190 W 2.5 A / 250 W
Power requirement AC 100 - 240V ~ 50 / 60 Hz
125
ENG
ENGLISH
SPECIFICATIONS
RGB (PC), HDMI (PC) supported mode
Resolution Horizontal
Frequency (kHz)
Vertical
Frequency (Hz)
640x350 31.468 70.09
720x400 31.469 70.08
640x480 31.469 59.94
800x600 37.879 60.31
1024x768 48.363 60.00
1360x768 47.712 60.015
1280x1024
(HDMI-PC) 63.981 60.02
1920x1080
(RGB-PC) 66.587 59.934
1920x1080
(HDMI-PC) 67.50 60.00
HDMI (DTV) supported mode
Resolution Horizontal
Frequency (kHz)
Vertical
Frequency (Hz)
720x480p 31.47 59.94
31.50 60.00
1280x720p 44.96 59.94
45.00 60.00
1920x1080i 33.72 59.94
33.75 60.00
1920x1080p
26.97 23.976
27.00 24.00
33.71 29.97
33.75 30.00
67.432 59.94
67.50 60.00
Component supported mode
Resolution Horizontal
Frequency (kHz)
Vertical
Frequency (Hz)
720x480i 15.73 59.94
15.73 60.00
720x480p 31.47 59.94
31.50 60.00
1280x720p 44.96 59.94
45.00 60.00
1920x1080i 33.72 59.94
33.75 60.00
1920x1080p
26.97 23.976
27.00 24.00
33.71 29.97
33.75 30.00
67.432 59.94
67.500 60.00
Component port connecting information
Component ports on the
TV Y PBPR
Video output ports
on DVD player
Y PBPR
Y B-Y R-Y
Y Cb Cr
Y Pb Pr
126
ENG
ENGLISH
SPECIFICATIONS
DivX supported mode
File
Extensions
Audio/
Video Codec Profile/Level Support Explanation
.asf
.wmv
Video
VC-1 Advanced Profile Advanced Profile@Level 3
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30) Only streams compliant to
SMPTE 421M VC-1 standard
are supported.
VC-1 Simple and Main
Profiles
Simple Profile@Medium Level (e.g. CIF,
QVGA)
Main Profile@High Level (e.g. 1080p30)
Audio WMA Standard
WMA 9 Professional
.divx
.avi
Video
DivX3.11
Global motion compensation
or quarterpel motion
estimation does not
supported. Streams
using this syntax are not
supported.
DivX4
DivX5
DivX6 Advanced Simple Profile
(e.g. 720p/1080i)
XViD
H.264 / AVC
Main Profile@ Level 4.1
High Profile@ Level 4.1
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
Audio
MPEG-1 Layer I, II
MPEG-1 Layer III (MP3)
Dolby Digital
.mp4
.m4v
.mov
Video
H.264 / AVC
Main Profile@ Level 4.1
High Profile@ Level 4.1
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
Global motion compensation
or quarterpel motion
estimation does not
supported. Streams
using this syntax are not
supported.
MPEG-4 Part 2 Advanced Simple Profile (e.g.
720p/1080i)
Audio MP3
.mkv
Video H.264 / AVC
Main Profile@ Level 4.1
High Profile@ Level 4.1
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
Most of the MKV content
available is encoded by the
open source x264 codec.
Audio MP3
Dolby Digital
.ts
.trp
.tp
Video
H.264 / AVC
Main Profile@ Level 4.1
High Profile@ Level 4.1
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
MPEG-2 Main Profile@High Level
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60)
VC-1
Simple Profile@Medium Level
(e.g. CIF, QVGA)
Main Profile@High Level
(e.g. 1080p30)
Advanced Profile@Level3
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
Only streams compliant to
SMPTE 421M VC-1 standard
are supported.
Audio
MPEG-1 Layer I, II
MPEG-1 Layer III (MP3)
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital Plus
MP3
.vob
Video
MPEG-1
MPEG-2 Main Profile@High Level
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60)
Audio
Dolby Digital
MPEG-1 Layer I, II
DVD-LPCM
.mpg Video MPEG-1 Main Profile@High Level
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60) Only streams compliant
configured properly for TS,
PS or ES
Audio MPEG-1 Layer I, II
127
ENG
ENGLISH
SPECIFICATIONS
3D supported formats
Input Signal Resolution
Horizontal
Frequency
(kHz)
Vertical
Frequency
(Hz)
Playable 3D video format
HDMI
720p 1280x720
45.00 60
»Side by Side
»Top & Bottom
»HDMI 3D Top & Bottom
90.00 60
»HDMI 3D Frame Packing
1080i 1920x1080 33.75 60
»Side by Side
»Top & Bottom
»HDMI 3D Side by Side (Half)
1080p 1920x1080
67.50 60
»Side by Side
»Top & Bottom
»Checker Board
»Single Frame Sequential
27.00 24
»Side by Side
»Top & Bottom
»Checker Board
»HDMI 3D Top & Bottom
54.00 24
»HDMI 3D Frame Packing
67.50 (
LCD
)30
»HDMI 3D Frame Packing
33.75 30
»Side by Side
»Top & Bottom
»Checker Board
Component
(
Plasma
)
720p 1280x720 44.96 59.94
»Side by Side
»Top & Bottom
45.00 60.00
1080i 1920x1080 33.72 59.94
»Side by Side
»Top & Bottom
33.75 60.00
RGB-PC 1080p 1920x1080 66.587 59.934
»Side by Side
»Top & Bottom
USB 1080p 1920x1080 33.75 30
»Side by Side
»Top & Bottom
»Checker Board
»MPO (Photo)
DLNA 1080p 1920x1080 33.75 30
»Side by Side
»Top & Bottom
»Checker Board
Signal Playable 3D video format
DTV 720p, 1080i
»Side by Side
»Top & Bottom
Media contents and a player need to support HDMI 3D Frame Packing, HDMI 3D Side by Side, HDMI 3D
Top & Bottom to play in 3D.
Video, which is input as HDMI 3D Frame Packing, HDMI 3D Side by Side, HDMI 3D Top & Bottom
format, is switched into the 3D screen automatically.
128
ENG
ENGLISH
SPECIFICATIONS
Wireless LAN for Broadband/DLNA Adaptor SPEC (For LV9500, LW9800 series)
This device only works with compatible LG TV.
Standard IEEE802.11a/b/g/n
Frequency Range
2402 to 2483 MHz
5150 to 5250 MHz
5725 to 5850 MHz
Modulation CCK / OFDM / MIMO
Output Power (Typical)
802.11a: 14 dBm
802.11b: 17 dBm
802.11g: 14 dBm
802.11n: 13 dBm
Data rate
802.11a/g: 54 Mbps
802.11b: 11 Mbps
802.11n: 300 Mbps
Antenna Gain (Typical)
2402 to 2483 MHz: 1.17 dBi
5150 to 5250 MHz: 4.67 dBi
5725 to 5850 MHz: 3.30 dBi
Occupied bandwidth 802.11a/b/g: HT20
802.11n: HT20/40
Because band channel used by the country could be different, the user can not change or adjust the
operating frequency and this product is set for the regional frequency table.
FCC ID of Wi-Fi module inside TV
FCC ID: BEJWN8522D1
RF module (BM-LDS201) specification
For TV By using a 2.4 GHz bandwidth radio frequency(RF).
Output: 1 dBm or lower
Maximum Communication Distance: 10 m (30 ft) in an open space
Bandwidth: 2.4 GHz (2.4035 GHz - 2.4783 GHz)
Transfer Rate: 250 kbps
FCC ID of RF module inside TV
FCC ID: BEJLDS201
129
ENG
ENGLISH
SPECIFICATIONS
IR CODES
(Depending on model)
How to Connect
Connect your wired remote control to the Remote Control port on the TV.
Remote Control IR Codes
Output waveform
Single pulse, modulated with 37.917kHz signal at 455kHz
T1
Tc
Frame configuration
1st frame
C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Lead code Low custom code High custom code Data code Data code
Repeat frame
Repeat code Tf
Lead code
4.5 ms
9 ms
Repeat code
2.25 ms
9 ms
0.55 ms
Bit description
0.56 ms
1.12 ms
0.56 ms
2.24 ms
Bit “0” Bit “1”
Frame interval: Tf
The waveform is transmitted as long as a key is depressed.
Tf Tf
Tf=108ms @455KHz
130
ENG
ENGLISH
IR CODES
Code
(Hexa) Function Note Code
(Hexa) Function Note
08 POWER Remote control Button
(Power On/Off)
0F TV Remote control Button
DC 3D Remote control Button
45
Q.MENU
Remote control Button 5B EXIT Remote control Button
43 Home Remote control Button D6 TV Discrete IR Code
(TV Input Selection)
0B INPUT Remote control Button
10 - 19 Number Key 0-9 Remote control Button C4 POWER ON Discrete IR Code
(Only Power Off)
4C - (Dash)/LIST Remote control Button
1A FLASHBK Remote control Button C5 POWER OFF Discrete IR Code
(Only Power Off)
09 MUTE/DELETE Remote control Button
02 VOL + Remote control Button 5A AV1 Discrete IR Code
(AV1 Input Selection)
03 VOL - Remote control Button
00 CH
^
Remote control Button D0 AV2 Discrete IR Code
(AV2 Input Selection)
01 CH
v
Remote control Button
1E FAV/MARK Remote control Button BF COMPONENT1 Discrete IR Code
(Component1 Input
Selection)
40
^
Remote control Button
41
v
Remote control Button D4 COMPONENT2 Discrete IR Code
(Component2 Input
Selection)
07
<
Remote control Button
06
>
Remote control Button D5 RGB-PC Discrete IR Code
(RGB-PC Input Selection)
44 ENTER Remote control Button
28 BACK Remote control Button CE HDMI1 Discrete IR Code
(HDMI1 Input Selection)
79 RATIO Remote control Button
BA (
Plasma
)FREEZE Remote control Button CC HDMI2 Discrete IR Code
(HDMI2 Input Selection)
95
ENERGY SAVING
Remote control Button
7E SIMPLINK Remote control Button E9 HDMI3 Discrete IR Code
(HDMI3 Input Selection)
AA INFO Remote control Button
30 AV MODE Remote control Button DA HDMI4 Discrete IR Code
(HDMI4 Input Selection)
72 RED Remote control Button
71 GREEN Remote control Button 76 Ratio 4:3 Discrete IR Code
(Only 4:3 Mode)
63 YELLOW Remote control Button
61 BLUE Remote control Button 77 Ratio 16:9 Discrete IR Code
(Only 16:9 Mode)
B1 nRemote control Button
B0 Remote control Button AF Ratio Cinema
Zoom
Discrete IR Code
(Only Cinema Zoom Mode)
BA yy Remote control Button
8E Remote control Button
8F Remote control Button
Use the feature depending on your model.
131
ENG
ENGLISH
IR CODES
EXTERNAL CONTROL DEVICE SETUP
RS-232C Setup
Connect the RS-232C (serial port) input jack to
an external control device (such as a computer or
an A/V control system) to control the product’s
functions externally.
Connect the serial port of the control device to the
RS-232C jack on the product back panel.
NOTE
RS-232C on this TV is intended to be used
with third party RS-232C control hardware
and software. The instructions below
are provided to help with programming
software or to test functionality using telenet
software. RS-232C connection cables are not
supplied with the product.
Type of connector;
D-Sub 9-Pin Male
1 5
6 9
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL & SERVICE)
No. Pin name
1 No connection
2 RXD (Receive data)
3 TXD (Transmit data)
4 DTR (DTE side ready)
5 GND
6 DSR (DCE side ready)
7 RTS (Ready to send)
8 CTS (Clear to send)
9 No Connection
132
ENG
ENGLISH
EXTERNAL CONTROL DEVICE SETUP
RS-232C configurations
7-Wire Configuration
(Serial female-female NULL modem cable)
PC TV
RXD 2 3 TXD
TXD 3 2 RXD
GND 5 5 GND
DTR 4 6 DSR
DSR 6 4 DTR
RTS 7 8 CTS
CTS 8 7 RTS
D-Sub 9 D-Sub 9
3-Wire Configurations(Not standard)
PC TV
RXD 2 3 TXD
TXD 3 2 RXD
GND 5 5 GND
DTR 4 6 DSR
DSR 6 4 DTR
RTS 7 8 CTS
CTS 8 7 RTS
D-Sub 9 D-Sub 9
Set ID
Set ID number.
?
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press ENTER.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
OPTION and press ENTER.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Set ID
and press ENTER.
5 Scroll left or right to select a set ID number and
select CLOSE. The adjustment range is 1-99.
6 When you are finished, press EXIT.
*Real data mapping
0 : Step 0
…
A : Step 10 (SET ID 10)
…
F : Step 15 (SET ID 15)
10 : Step 16 (SET ID 16)
…
63 : Step 99 (SET ID 99)
64 : Step 100
133
ENG
ENGLISH
EXTERNAL CONTROL DEVICE SETUP
Command reference list
Communication Parameters
Baud rate: 9600 bps (UART)
Data length: 8 bits
Parity : None
Stop bit: 1 bit
Communication code: ASCII code
Use a crossed (reverse) cable.
COMMAND1 COMMAND2 DATA
(Hexadecimal) COMMAND1 COMMAND2 DATA
(Hexadecimal)
01. Power k a 00 - 01 14. Treble k r 00 - 64
02. Input Select x b (See p.136) 15. Bass k s 00 - 64
03. Aspect
Ratio k c (See p.136) 16. Balance k t 00 - 64
04. Screen
Mute k d 00 - 01 17. 3D (For 3D
TV) x t (See p.137)
05. Volume
Mute k e 00 - 01 18. Color
Temperature x u 00 - 64
06. Volume
Control k f 00 - 64 19.Extended
3D (For 3D TV) x v (See p.137)
07. Contrast k g 00 - 64 20. ISM
Method (
Plasma
)j p (See p.138)
08. Brightness k h 00 - 64 21. Energy
Saving j q (See p.138)
09. Color k i 00 - 64 22. Auto
Configuration j u (See p.138)
10. Tint k j 00 - 64 24. Channel
Add/Del m b 00 - 01
11. Sharpness k k 00 - 64 25. Key m c (See p.138)
12. OSD Select k l 00 - 01 26. Backlight
(
LCD
)
m g 00 - 64
13. Remote
Control Lock
Mode
k m 00 - 01
COMMAND1 COMMAND2
DATA00
(Hexadecimal)
DATA01
(Hexadecimal)
DATA02
(Hexadecimal)
DATA03
(Hexadecimal)
DATA04
(Hexadecimal)
DATA05
(Hexadecimal)
23. Channel
Tuning m a
physical
program
high
major
program
low
major low minor high minor low attribute
134
ENG
ENGLISH
EXTERNAL CONTROL DEVICE SETUP
Transmission / Receiving protocol
Transmission
[Command1][Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
[Command 1] : First command to control the set.(j, k, m or x)
[Command 2] : Second command to control the set.
[Set ID] : You can adjust the set ID to choose desired set ID number in Option menu. Adjustment range is
1~ 99. When selecting Set ID ‘0’, every connected the set is controlled. Set ID is indicated as decimal (1~
99) on menu and as Hexa decimal (0x0~ 0x63) on transmission /receiving protocol.
[DATA] : To transmit the command data.
Transmit the ‘FF’ data to read status of command.
[Cr] : Carriage Return
ASCII code ‘0x0D’
[ ] : ASCII code ‘space (0x20)’
* In this model, set will not send the status during the standby mode.
OK Acknowledgement
[Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][OK][Data][x]
The set transmits ACK (acknowledgement) based on this format when receiving normal data. At this time,
if the data is data read mode, it indicates present status data. If the data is data write mode, it returns the
data of the PC computer.
* In this model, set will not send the status during the standby mode.
* Data Format
[Command 2] : Use as command.
[Set ID] : Use the small character, if set ID is 10, it will send the ‘0’, ‘a’.
[DATA] : Use the small character, if data is 0 x ab, it will send the ‘a’, ‘b’.
[OK] : Use the large character.
Error Acknowledgement
[Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][NG][Data][x]
The set transmits ACK (acknowledgement) based on this format when receiving abnormal data from non-
viable functions or communication errors.
Data1: Illegal Code
Data2: Not supported function
Data3: Wait more time
* In this model, set will not send the status during the standby mode.
* Data Format
[Command 2] : Use as command.
[Set ID] : Use the small character, if set ID is 10, it will send the ‘0’, ‘a’.
[DATA] : Use the small character, if data is 0 x ab, it will send the ‘a’, ‘b’.
[NG] : Use the large character
135
ENG
ENGLISH
EXTERNAL CONTROL DEVICE SETUP
01. Power (Command: k a)
To control Power On/Off of the set.
Transmission [k][a][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00: Power Off Data 01: Power On
Acknowledgement [a][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
* In a like manner, if other functions transmit ‘FF’
data based on this format, Acknowledgement data
feedback presents status about each function.
* Note: In this model, set will send the Acknowledge
after power on processing completion.
There might be a time delay between command and
acknowledge.
02. Input Select (Command: x b)
To select input source for set.
Transmission [x][b][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00: DTV (Antenna) Data 01: DTV (Cable)
Data 10: Analog (Antenna) Data 11: Analog (Cable)
Data 20: AV or AV1 Data 21: AV2
Data 40: Component1 Data 41: Component2
Data 42: Component3 Data 60: RGB-PC
Data 90: HDMI1 Data 91: HDMI2
Data 92: HDMI3 Data 93: HDMI4
Acknowledgement [b][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
* Use the feature depending on your model.
03. Aspect Ratio (Command: k c)
To adjust the screen format.
Transmission [k][c][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 01: 4:3 Data 09: Just scan
Data 02: 16:9 Data 10: Cinema Zoom 1
Data 06: Set by program
…
Data 1F: Cinema Zoom16
Acknowledgement [c][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
04. Screen Mute (Command: k d)
To select screen mute on/off.
Transmission [k][d][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00:
Screen mute off (Picture on), Video-out
Mute off
Data 01: Screen mute on (Picture off)
Data 10: Video-out Mute on
Acknowledgement [d][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
* In case of Video-out Mute on only,
TV will display On
Screen Display (OSD). But, in case of screen mute on,
TV will not display On Screen Display (OSD).
05. Volume Mute (Command: k e)
To control volume mute on/off.
You can also adjust mute using the MUTE button on
remote control.
Transmission [k][e][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00: Volume mute on (Volume off)
Data 01: Volume mute off (Volume on)
Acknowledgement [e][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
06. Volume Control (Command: k f)
To adjust volume.
You can also adjust volume with the volume buttons
on remote control.
Transmission [k][f][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min: 00 ~ Max: 64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal
code)
*Refer to “Real data mapping”.
Acknowledgement [f][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
07. Contrast (Command: k g)
To adjust screen contrast.
You can also adjust contrast in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission [k][g][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min: 00 ~ Max: 64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal
code)
*Refer to “Real data mapping”.
Acknowledgement [g][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
08. Brightness (Command: k h)
To adjust screen brightness.
You can also adjust brightness in the PICTURE
menu.
Transmission [k][h][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min: 00 ~ Max: 64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal
code)
*Refer to “Real data mapping”.
Acknowledgement [h][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
09. Color (Command: k i)
To adjust screen color.
You can also adjust color in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission [k][i][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min: 00 ~ Max: 64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal
code)
*Refer to “Real data mapping”.
Acknowledgement [i][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
10. Tint (Command: k j)
To adjust screen tint.
You can also adjust tint in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission [k][j][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Red: 00 ~ Green: 64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal
code)
*Refer to “Real data mapping”.
Acknowledgement [ j ][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
11. Sharpness (Command: k k)
To adjust screen sharpness.
You can also adjust sharpness in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission [k][k][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min: 00 ~ Max: 64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal
code)
*Refer to “Real data mapping”.
Acknowledgement [k][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
136
ENG
ENGLISH
EXTERNAL CONTROL DEVICE SETUP
12. OSD Select (Command: k l)
To select OSD (On Screen Display) on/off.
Transmission [k][l][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00: OSD off Data 01: OSD on
Acknowledgement [l][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
13. Remote Control Lock Mode (Command: k m)
To lock the remote control and the front panel
controls on the set.
Transmission [k][m][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00: Lock off Data 01: Lock on
Acknowledgement [m][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
If you’re not using the remote control and front panel
controls on the Monitor set, use this mode. When
main power is on/off, remote control lock is released.
If Key Lock is on in the standby mode, TV will not
turn on by POWER button of remote control and on
the TV.
14. Treble (Command: k r)
To adjust treble.
You can also adjust treble in the AUDIO menu.
Transmission [k][r][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min: 00 ~ Max: 64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal
code)
*Refer to “Real data mapping”.
Acknowledgement [r][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
15. Bass (Command: k s)
To adjust bass.
You can also adjust bass in the AUDIO menu.
Transmission [k][s][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min: 00 ~ Max: 64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal
code)
*Refer to “Real data mapping”.
Acknowledgement [s][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
16. Balance (Command: k t)
To adjust balance.
You can also adjust balance in the AUDIO menu.
Transmission [k][t][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min: 00 ~ Max: 64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal
code)
*Refer to “Real data mapping”.
Acknowledgement [t][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
17. 3D (Command: x t) (For 3D TV)
To change 3D mode for TV.
Transmission [x][t][ ][Set ID][ ][Data01]
[ ][Data02][ ][Data03][ ][Data04][Cr]
Data1
00: 3D On 01: 3D Off
02: 3D to 2D 03: 2D to 3D
Data2
00: Top and Bottom 01: Side by Side
02: Check Board 03: Frame Sequential
Data3
00: Right to Left 01: Left to Right
Data4
3D Depth: Min : 00 ~ Max : 14
(*transmit by Hexadecimal code)
* If data1 is 00 (3D On), data4 has no meaning.
* If data1 is 01 (3D off) or 02 (3D to 2D), data2, data3
and data4 have no meaning.
* If data1 is 03 (2D to 3D), data2 and data3 have no
meaning.
Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4
00 o o x
01 x x x
02 x x x
03 x x o
x : Don’t care
Acknowledgement [t][ ][OK][Data01][Data02]
[Data03][Data04][x][t][ ][NG][Data01][x]
18. Color Temperature (Command: x u)
To adjust color temperature.
You can also adjust color temperature in the
PICTURE menu.
Transmission [x][u][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min: 00 ~ Max: 64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal
code)
*Refer to “Real data mapping”.
Acknowledgement [u][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
19. Extended 3D (Command: x v) (For 3D TV)
To change 3D option for TV.
Transmission [x][v][ ][Set ID][ ][Data01][ ][Data02][Cr]
Data1: 3D option
00: 3D Picture Correction
01: 3D Depth (2D to 3D Only)
02: 3D Viewpoint
03: 3D Picture Size
04: 3D Picture Balance
05: 3D Optimization
Data2: It has own range for each 3D option
determined by Data1.
1) When Data1 is 00
00: Right to Left 01: Left to Right
2) When Data1 is 01
Data Min: 00 ~ Max: 14 (*transmit by Hexadecimal code)
3) When Data1 is 02
Data Min: 00 ~ Max: 14 (*transmit by Hexadecimal code)
4) When Data1 is 03
00: Just Scan 01: 16:9
5) When Data1 is 04
00: Off 01: On
6) When Data1 is 05
Data Min: 00 ~ Max: 02 (*transmit by Hexadecimal code)
Acknowledgement [v][ ][OK][Data01][Data02][x]
[v][ ][NG][Data01][x]
* Use the feature depending on your model.
137
ENG
ENGLISH
EXTERNAL CONTROL DEVICE SETUP
20. ISM Method (Command: j p) (
Plasma
)
To avoid having a fixed image remain on screen.
Transmission [j][p][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 02: Orbiter
04: White Wash
08: Normal
20: Color Wash
Acknowledgement [p][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
21. Energy Saving (Command: j q)
To control the energy saving function.
Transmission [ j ][q][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00: off
01: Minimum
02: Medium
03: Maximum
04: Auto (Depending on model)
05: Screen off
Acknowledgement [q][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
22. Auto Configuration (Command: j u)
To adjust picture position and minimize image
shaking automatically. Auto configuration only works
in RGB-PC mode.
Transmission [ j ][u][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 01: To set
Acknowledgement [u][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
23. Channel Tuning (Command: m a)
To tune channel to following physical/major/minor
number.
(This feature is not available for all models.)
Transmission [m][a][ ][Set ID][ ][Data00][ ][Data01]
[ ][Data02][ ][Data03][ ][Data04][ ][Data05][Cr]
Digital channels have a Physical, Major, and Minor
channel number. The Physical number is the actual
digital channel number, the Major is the number that
the channel should be mapped to, and the Minor is
the sub-channel. Since the ATSC tuner automatically
maps the channel to the Major number, the Physical
number is not required when sending a command.
Data 00: Physical Channel Number
NTSC air: 02~45, NTSC cable: 01, 0E~7D
ATSC air: 01~45, ATSC cable: 01~87
Data 01 & 02: Major Channel Number
Data 01: High byte Data 02: Low byte
Two bytes are available for the Major and Minor,
normally only the second byte is used.
Data 03 & 04: Minor Channel Number
Not needed for NTSC.
The table lists the binary code which must be
converted to Hexadecimal before sending. For
example:
The binary code to tune the sub source to an NTSC
cable channel is “1000 0001”, which translates to
“81” in Hex.
* 7th bit : For which source do you want to change
the channel.
* 6th bit: Use a two part or one part channel. Most
cases just use 0 since it’s ignored when using
NTSC.
* 5th bit: Use 0 with NTSC since it can only use
the physical channel number. Normally use 1 for
ATSC since most times it doesn’t matter what the
physical number is.
* 4th bit: Set to 0.
* 3-0 bits: Choose signal type.
* Tune Command Examples:
1. Tune to the analog (NTSC) cable channel 35.
Data 00 = Physical of 35 = 23
Data 01 & 02 = No Major = 00 00
Data 03 & 04 = No Minor = 00 00
Data 05 = 0000 0001 in binary = 01
Total = ma 00 23 00 00 00 00 01
2. Tune to the digital (ATSC) local channel 30-3.
Data 00 = Don’t know Physical = 00
Data 01 & 02 = Major is 30 = 00 1E
Data 03 & 04 = Minor is 3 = 00 03
Data 05 = 0010 0010 in binary = 22
Total = ma 00 00 00 1E 00 03 22
24. Channel Add/Del (Command: m b)
To add and delete the channels.
Transmission [m][b][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00: Channel Delete Data 01: Channel Add
Acknowledgement [b][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
25. Key (Command: m c)
To send IR remote key code.
Transmission [m][c][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
See page 131.
Acknowledgement [c][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
When TV is in the standby mode, TV will turn on by
POWER button of remote control only.
26. Backlight (Command: m g) (
LCD
)
To adjust screen backlight.
Transmission [m][g][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min:00 ~ Max:64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal
code)
*Refer to “Real data mapping”.
Acknowledgement [g][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
138
ENG
ENGLISH
EXTERNAL CONTROL DEVICE SETUP
* Table List (Channel Tuning)
7Main/Sub
Picture 6
Two/One
Part
Channel
5
Using
Physical
Channel
4
Reserved 3 2 1 0 Step
0 Main 0 Two 0 Use x 0 0 0 0 NTSC Air
1 Sub 1 One 1 No Use x 0 0 0 1 NTSC Cable
x 0 0 1 0 ATSC Air
x 0 0 1 1 ATSC Cable_std
x 0 1 0 0 ATSC Cable_hrc
x 0 1 0 1 ATSC Cable_irc
x 0 1 1 0 ATSC cable_auto
x 0 1 1 1 Reserved
x x x x x ...
x 1 1 1 1 Reserved
139
ENG
ENGLISH
EXTERNAL CONTROL DEVICE SETUP
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
Please be informed that LG Electronics products
may contain open source software listed in the
tables below.
License Component
Apache license bonjour
MIT license cares
curl
fontconfig
libcurl
libxml2
libxslt
lua interpreter
expat license expat
Freetype
license
freetype
JPEG license libjpeg
OpenSSL
license
openssl
Zlib/libpng
license
libmng
libpng
zlib
portmap license portmap
pixman license pixman
X.net license libicu
BSD license netBSD
Simple XML Parser
xySSL
RSA Data
security license
MD5
JSON license JSON
MS92 license snacc
LG Electronics products may also contain open
source software listed as Components in the
table below, and you may download the complete
source code thereof free of charge, from LG
Electronics website (http://opensource.lge.
com) for a period of three (3) years from our last
shipment of this product. Please be informed that
the open source software is subject to the terms
and conditions of the applicable open source
licenses, which are provided to you hereinbelow.
License Component
GNU GPL v2.0 Linux kernel 2.6
alsa
busybox
e2fsprogs
gdbserver
jfsutils
lzo
msdl 1.1
mtd-utils
ntpclient
procps
GNU LGPL v2.1 atk
directFB
ffmpeg
glib
gnuTLS
gail
GTK+
iconv
libintl
libgcrypt
libgpg-error
libgphoto2
libsoup
pango
pyenchant
qt
uClibc
webkit
MPL 1.1 cairo
nanox
mozilla firefox
zziplib
140
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software
Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-
1301, USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute
verbatim copies of this license document, but
changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to
take away your freedom to share and change it.
By contrast, the GNU General Public License is
intended to guarantee your freedom to share and
change free software--to make sure the software
is free for all its users. This General Public License
applies to most of the Free Software Foundation’s
software and to any other program whose authors
commit to using it. (Some other Free Software
Foundation software is covered by the GNU
Lesser General Public License instead.) You can
apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring
to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses
are designed to make sure that you have the
freedom to distribute copies of free software
(and charge for this service if you wish), that you
receive source code or can get it if you want it,
that you can change the software or use pieces
of it in new free programs; and that you know you
can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make
restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these
rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These
restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for
you if you distribute copies of the software, or if
you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a
program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must
give the recipients all the rights that you have. You
must make sure that they, too, receive or can get
the source code. And you must show them these
terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1)
copyright the software, and (2) offer you this
license which gives you legal permission to copy,
distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we
want to make certain that everyone understands
that there is no warranty for this free software.
If the software is modified by someone else and
passed on, we want its recipients to know that
what they have is not the original, so that any
problems introduced by others will not reflect on
the original authors’ reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly
by software patents. We wish to avoid the
danger that redistributors of a free program will
individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making
the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have
made it clear that any patent must be licensed for
everyone’s free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying,
distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,
DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other
work which contains a notice placed by the
copyright holder saying it may be distributed
under the terms of this General Public License.
The “Program”, below, refers to any such
program or work, and a “work based on the
Program” means either the Program or any
derivative work under copyright law: that is to
say, a work containing the Program or a portion
of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/
or translated into another language. (Hereinafter,
translation is included without limitation in
the term “modification”.) Each licensee is
addressed as “you”.
Activities other than copying, distribution and
modification are not covered by this License;
they are outside its scope. The act of running
the Program is not restricted, and the output
from the Program is covered only if its contents
constitute a work based on the Program
(independent of having been made by running
the Program). Whether that is true depends on
what the Program does.
141
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of
the Program’s source code as you receive it, in
any medium, provided that you conspicuously
and appropriately publish on each copy an
appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer
of warranty; keep intact all the notices that
refer to this License and to the absence of any
warranty; and give any other recipients of the
Program a copy of this License along with the
Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of
transferring a copy, and you may at your option
offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the
Program or any portion of it, thus forming a
work based on the Program, and copy and
distribute such modifications or work under the
terms of Section 1 above, provided that you
also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry
prominent notices stating that you changed
the files and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute
or publish, that in whole or in part contains
or is derived from the Program or any part
thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no
charge to all third parties under the terms of
this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads
commands interactively when run, you must
cause it, when started running for such
interactive use in the most ordinary way, to
print or display an announcement including
an appropriate copyright notice and a notice
that there is no warranty (or else, saying
that you provide a warranty) and that users
may redistribute the program under these
conditions, and telling the user how to view
a copy of this License. (Exception: if the
Program itself is interactive but does not
normally print such an announcement, your
work based on the Program is not required
to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified
work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that
work are not derived from the Program, and
can be reasonably considered independent
and separate works in themselves, then this
License, and its terms, do not apply to those
sections when you distribute them as separate
works. But when you distribute the same
sections as part of a whole which is a work
based on the Program, the distribution of the
whole must be on the terms of this License,
whose permissions for other licensees extend
to the entire whole, and thus to each and every
part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim
rights or contest your rights to work written
entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise
the right to control the distribution of derivative
or collective works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work
not based on the Program with the Program (or
with a work based on the Program) on a volume
of a storage or distribution medium does not
bring the other work under the scope of this
License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or
a work based on it, under Section 2) in object
code or executable form under the terms of
Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also
do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete
corresponding machine-readable source
code, which must be distributed under
the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on
a medium customarily used for software
interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for
at least three years, to give any third party,
for a charge no more than your cost of
physically performing source distribution,
a complete machine-readable copy of the
corresponding source code, to be distributed
under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above
on a medium customarily used for software
interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you
received as to the offer to distribute
corresponding source code. (This alternative
is allowed only for noncommercial
142
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or
any work based on the Program), the recipient
automatically receives a license from the
original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the
Program subject to these terms and conditions.
You may not impose any further restrictions on
the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted
herein. You are not responsible for enforcing
compliance by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or
allegation of patent infringement or for any
other reason (not limited to patent issues),
conditions are imposed on you (whether by
court order, agreement or otherwise) that
contradict the conditions of this License,
they do not excuse you from the conditions
of this License. If you cannot distribute so
as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations
under this License and any other pertinent
obligations, then as a consequence you may
not distribute the Program at all. For example,
if a patent license would not permit royalty-free
redistribution of the Program by all those who
receive copies directly or indirectly through you,
then the only way you could satisfy both it and
this License would be to refrain entirely from
distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid
or unenforceable under any particular
circumstance, the balance of the section is
intended to apply and the section as a whole is
intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce
you to infringe any patents or other property
right claims or to contest validity of any such
claims; this section has the sole purpose of
protecting the integrity of the free software
distribution system, which is implemented by
public license practices. Many people have
made generous contributions to the wide range
of software distributed through that system
in reliance on consistent application of that
system; it is up to the author/donor to decide
if he or she is willing to distribute software
through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly
clear what is believed to be a consequence of
the rest of this License.
distribution and only if you received the
program in object code or executable form
with such an offer, in accord with Subsection
b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred
form of the work for making modifications to
it. For an executable work, complete source
code means all the source code for all modules
it contains, plus any associated interface
definition files, plus the scripts used to control
compilation and installation of the executable.
However, as a special exception, the source
code distributed need not include anything that
is normally distributed (in either source or binary
form) with the major components (compiler,
kernel, and so on) of the operating system
on which the executable runs, unless that
component itself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code
is made by offering access to copy from a
designated place, then offering equivalent
access to copy the source code from the same
place counts as distribution of the source code,
even though third parties are not compelled to
copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or
distribute the Program except as expressly
provided under this License. Any attempt
otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or
distribute the Program is void, and will
automatically terminate your rights under this
License. However, parties who have received
copies, or rights, from you under this License
will not have their licenses terminated so long
as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License,
since you have not signed it. However,
nothing else grants you permission to modify
or distribute the Program or its derivative
works. These actions are prohibited by law if
you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
modifying or distributing the Program (or any
work based on the Program), you indicate your
acceptance of this License to do so, and all its
terms and conditions for copying, distributing or
modifying the Program or works based on it.
143
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is
restricted in certain countries either by patents
or by copyrighted interfaces, the original
copyright holder who places the Program under
this License may add an explicit geographical
distribution limitation excluding those countries,
so that distribution is permitted only in or
among countries not thus excluded. In such
case, this License incorporates the limitation as
if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish
revised and/or new versions of the General
Public License from time to time. Such new
versions will be similar in spirit to the present
version, but may differ in detail to address new
problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version
number. If the Program specifies a version
number of this License which applies to it and
“any later version”, you have the option of
following the terms and conditions either of that
version or of any later version published by the
Free Software Foundation. If the Program does
not specify a version number of this License,
you may choose any version ever published by
the Free Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program
into other free programs whose distribution
conditions are different, write to the author
to ask for permission. For software which is
copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation,
write to the Free Software Foundation; we
sometimes make exceptions for this. Our
decision will be guided by the two goals of
preserving the free status of all derivatives of
our free software and of promoting the sharing
and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED
FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT
WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER
PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS”
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH
YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF
ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR
CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY
APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER,
OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY
AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS
PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU
FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE
OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM
(INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS
OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE
OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH
ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH
HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
144
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
For example, if you distribute copies of the library,
whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the
recipients all the rights that we gave you. You
must make sure that they, too, receive or can get
the source code. If you link other code with the
library, you must provide complete object files to
the recipients, so that they can relink them with
the library after making changes to the library and
recompiling it. And you must show them these
terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1)
we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this
license, which gives you legal permission to copy,
distribute and/or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it
very clear that there is no warranty for the free
library. Also, if the library is modified by someone
else and passed on, the recipients should know
that what they have is not the original version,
so that the original author’s reputation will not be
affected by problems that might be introduced by
others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat
to the existence of any free program. We wish
to make sure that a company cannot effectively
restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a
restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore,
we insist that any patent license obtained for a
version of the library must be consistent with the
full freedom of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries,
is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public
License. This license, the GNU Lesser General
Public License, applies to certain designated
libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary
General Public License. We use this license for
certain libraries in order to permit linking those
libraries into non-free programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether
statically or using a shared library, the combination
of the two is legally speaking a combined work,
a derivative of the original library. The ordinary
General Public License therefore permits such
linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria
of freedom. The Lesser General Public License
permits more lax criteria for linking other code
with the library.
GNU Lesser General Public
License
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software
Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330,
Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is
permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not
allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser
GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU
Library Public License, version 2, hence the
version number 2.1.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to
take away your freedom to share and change it.
By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are
intended to guarantee your freedom to share and
change free software--to make sure the software
is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License,
applies to some specially designated software
packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software
Foundation and other authors who decide to
use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you
first think carefully about whether this license or
the ordinary General Public License is the better
strategy to use in any particular case, based on the
explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring
to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public
Licenses are designed to make sure that you have
the freedom to distribute copies of free software
(and charge for this service if you wish); that you
receive source code or can get it if you want it;
that you can change the software and use pieces
of it in new free programs; and that you are
informed that you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make
restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you
these rights or to ask you to surrender these
rights. These restrictions translate to certain
responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of
the library or if you modify it.
145
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
We call this license the “Lesser” General Public
License because it does Less to protect the user’s
freedom than the ordinary General Public License.
It also provides other free software developers
Less of an advantage over competing non-free
programs. These disadvantages are the reason we
use the ordinary General Public License for many
libraries. However, the Lesser license provides
advantages in certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a
special need to encourage the widest possible use
of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto
standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must
be allowed to use the library. A more frequent
case is that a free library does the same job as
widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there
is little to gain by limiting the free library to free
software only, so we use the Lesser General
Public License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular
library in non-free programs enables a greater
number of people to use a large body of free
software. For example, permission to use the GNU
C Library in non-free programs enables many more
people to use the whole GNU operating system,
as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating
system.
Although the Lesser General Public License
is Less protective of the users’ freedom, it
does ensure that the user of a program that is
linked with the Library has the freedom and the
wherewithal to run that program using a modified
version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying,
distribution and modification follow. Pay close
attention to the difference between a “work based
on the library” and a “work that uses the library”.
The former contains code derived from the library,
whereas the latter must be combined with the
library in order to run.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,
DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software
library or other program which contains a
notice placed by the copyright holder or other
authorized party saying it may be distributed
under the terms of this Lesser General Public
License (also called “this License”). Each
licensee is addressed as “you”.
A “library” means a collection of software
functions and/or data prepared so as to be
conveniently linked with application programs
(which use some of those functions and data)
to form executables.
The “Library”, below, refers to any such
software library or work which has been
distributed under these terms. A “work based
on the Library” means either the Library or any
derivative work under copyright law: that is to
say, a work containing the Library or a portion
of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/
or translated straightforwardly into another
language. (Hereinafter, translation is included
without limitation in the term “modification”.)
“Source code” for a work means the preferred
form of the work for making modifications to
it. For a library, complete source code means
all the source code for all modules it contains,
plus any associated interface definition files,
plus the scripts used to control compilation and
installation of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and
modification are not covered by this License;
they are outside its scope. The act of running a
program using the Library is not restricted, and
output from such a program is covered only
if its contents constitute a work based on the
Library (independent of the use of the Library
in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true
depends on what the Library does and what the
program that uses the Library does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies
of the Library’s complete source code as you
receive it, in any medium, provided that you
conspicuously and appropriately publish on
each copy an appropriate copyright notice
and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
notices that refer to this License and to the
absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy
of this License along with the Library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of
transferring a copy, and you may at your option
offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
146
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the
Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work
based on the Library, and copy and distribute
such modifications or work under the terms of
Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all
of these conditions:
a) The modified work must itself be a software
library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry
prominent notices stating that you changed
the files and the date of any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to
be licensed at no charge to all third parties
under the terms of this License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a
function or a table of data to be supplied by
an application program that uses the facility,
other than as an argument passed when
the facility is invoked, then you must make
a good faith effort to ensure that, in the
event an application does not supply such
function or table, the facility still operates,
and performs whatever part of its purpose
remains meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to
compute square roots has a purpose that
is entirely well-defined independent of
the application. Therefore, Subsection
2d requires that any application-supplied
function or table used by this function must
be optional: if the application does not
supply it, the square root function must still
compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified
work as a whole. If identifiable sections
of that work are not derived from the
Library, and can be reasonably considered
independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms,
do not apply to those sections when you
distribute them as separate works. But when
you distribute the same sections as part of a
whole which is a work based on the Library,
the distribution of the whole must be on the
terms of this License, whose permissions for
other licensees extend to the entire whole,
and thus to each and every part regardless
of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to
claim rights or contest your rights to work
written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
exercise the right to control the distribution
of derivative or collective works based on
the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work
not based on the Library with the Library (or
with a work based on the Library) on a volume
of a storage or distribution medium does not
bring the other work under the scope of this
License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary
GNU General Public License instead of this
License to a given copy of the Library. To do
this, you must alter all the notices that refer to
this License, so that they refer to the ordinary
GNU General Public License, version 2, instead
of to this License. (If a newer version than
version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public
License has appeared, then you can specify
that version instead if you wish.) Do not make
any other change in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is
irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU
General Public License applies to all subsequent
copies and derivative works made from that
copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy
part of the code of the Library into a program
that is not a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a
portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in
object code or executable form under the terms
of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you
accompany it with the complete corresponding
machine-readable source code, which must
be distributed under the terms of Sections 1
and 2 above on a medium customarily used for
software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering
access to copy from a designated place,
then offering equivalent access to copy the
source code from the same place satisfies the
147
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
requirement to distribute the source code, even
though third parties are not compelled to copy
the source along with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any
portion of the Library, but is designed to work
with the Library by being compiled or linked
with it, is called a “work that uses the Library”.
Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative
work of the Library, and therefore falls outside
the scope of this License.
However, linking a “work that uses the Library”
with the Library creates an executable that is
a derivative of the Library (because it contains
portions of the Library), rather than a “work that
uses the library”. The executable is therefore
covered by this License. Section 6 states terms
for distribution of such executables.
When a “work that uses the Library” uses
material from a header file that is part of the
Library, the object code for the work may be
a derivative work of the Library even though
the source code is not. Whether this is true is
especially significant if the work can be linked
without the Library, or if the work is itself a
library. The threshold for this to be true is not
precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical
parameters, data structure layouts and
accessors, and small macros and small inline
functions (ten lines or less in length), then the
use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless
of whether it is legally a derivative work.
(Executables containing this object code plus
portions of the Library will still fall under Section
6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the
Library, you may distribute the object code
for the work under the terms of Section 6.
Any executables containing that work also fall
under Section 6, whether or not they are linked
directly with the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you
may also combine or link a “work that uses
the Library” with the Library to produce a work
containing portions of the Library, and distribute
that work under terms of your choice, provided
that the terms permit modification of the
work for the customer’s own use and reverse
engineering for debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each
copy of the work that the Library is used in it
and that the Library and its use are covered by
this License. You must supply a copy of this
License. If the work during execution displays
copyright notices, you must include the
copyright notice for the Library among them,
as well as a reference directing the user to the
copy of this License. Also, you must do one of
these things:
a) Accompany the work with the complete
corresponding machine-readable source
code for the Library including whatever
changes were used in the work (which
must be distributed under Sections 1 and
2 above); and, if the work is an executable
linked with the Library, with the complete
machine-readable “work that uses the
Library”, as object code and/or source code,
so that the user can modify the Library and
then relink to produce a modified executable
containing the modified Library. (It is
understood that the user who changes the
contents of definitions files in the Library
will not necessarily be able to recompile the
application to use the modified definitions.)
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism
for linking with the Library. A suitable
mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time
a copy of the library already present on the
user’s computer system, rather than copying
library functions into the executable, and
(2) will operate properly with a modified
version of the library, if the user installs one,
as long as the modified version is interface-
compatible with the version that the work
was made with.
c) Accompany the work with a written offer,
valid for at least three years, to give the
same user the materials specified in
Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more
than the cost of performing this distribution.
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering
access to copy from a designated place,
148
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
offer equivalent access to copy the above
specified materials from the same place.
e) Verify that the user has already received a
copy of these materials or that you have
already sent this user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the
“work that uses the Library” must include
any data and utility programs needed for
reproducing the executable from it. However,
as a special exception, the materials to be
distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (in either source or binary
form) with the major components (compiler,
kernel, and so on) of the operating system
on which the executable runs, unless that
component itself accompanies the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts
the license restrictions of other proprietary
libraries that do not normally accompany the
operating system. Such a contradiction means
you cannot use both them and the Library
together in an executable that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work
based on the Library side-by-side in a single
library together with other library facilities not
covered by this License, and distribute such a
combined library, provided that the separate
distribution of the work based on the Library
and of the other library facilities is otherwise
permitted, and provided that you do these two
things:
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy
of the same work based on the Library,
uncombined with any other library facilities.
This must be distributed under the terms of
the Sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined
library of the fact that part of it is a work
based on the Library, and explaining where
to find the accompanying uncombined form
of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with,
or distribute the Library except as expressly
provided under this License. Any attempt
otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link
with, or distribute the Library is void, and will
automatically terminate your rights under this
License. However, parties who have received
copies, or rights, from you under this License
will not have their licenses terminated so long
as such parties remain in full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License,
since you have not signed it. However, nothing
else grants you permission to modify or
distribute the Library or its derivative works.
These actions are prohibited by law if you do
not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying
or distributing the Library (or any work based
on the Library), you indicate your acceptance
of this License to do so, and all its terms and
conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
the Library or works based on it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or
any work based on the Library), the recipient
automatically receives a license from the
original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or
modify the Library subject to these terms and
conditions. You may not impose any further
restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the
rights granted herein. You are not responsible
for enforcing compliance by third parties with
this License.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or
allegation of patent infringement or for any
other reason (not limited to patent issues),
conditions are imposed on you (whether by
court order, agreement or otherwise) that
contradict the conditions of this License,
they do not excuse you from the conditions
of this License. If you cannot distribute so
as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations
under this License and any other pertinent
obligations, then as a consequence you may
not distribute the Library at all. For example, if
a patent license would not permit royalty-free
redistribution of the Library by all those who
receive copies directly or indirectly through
you, then the only way you could satisfy both
it and this License would be to refrain entirely
from distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid
or unenforceable under any particular
circumstance, the balance of the section is
149
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
intended to apply, and the section as a whole
is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce
you to infringe any patents or other property
right claims or to contest validity of any such
claims; this section has the sole purpose of
protecting the integrity of the free software
distribution system which is implemented by
public license practices. Many people have
made generous contributions to the wide
range of software distributed through that
system in reliance on consistent application
of that system; it is up to the author/donor
to decide if he or she is willing to distribute
software through any other system and a
licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly
clear what is believed to be a consequence of
the rest of this License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is
restricted in certain countries either by patents
or by copyrighted interfaces, the original
copyright holder who places the Library under
this License may add an explicit geographical
distribution limitation excluding those
countries, so that distribution is permitted
only in or among countries not thus excluded.
In such case, this License incorporates the
limitation as if written in the body of this
License.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish
revised and/or new versions of the Lesser
General Public License from time to time.
Such new versions will be similar in spirit to
the present version, but may differ in detail to
address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version
number. If the Library specifies a version
number of this License which applies to it and
“any later version”, you have the option of
following the terms and conditions either of
that version or of any later version published
by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library
does not specify a license version number,
you may choose any version ever published by
the Free Software Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library
into other free programs whose distribution
conditions are incompatible with these,
write to the author to ask for permission.
For software which is copyrighted by the
Free Software Foundation, write to the Free
Software Foundation; we sometimes make
exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided
by the two goals of preserving the free status
of all derivatives of our free software and of
promoting the sharing and reuse of software
generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE
OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR
THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED
BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER
PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY “AS IS”
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY
AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS
WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF
ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR
CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY
APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER,
OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY
AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS
PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU
FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR
INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR
DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR
LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD
PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO
OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE),
EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGES.
150
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
If you develop a new library, and you want it to
be of the greatest possible use to the public, we
recommend making it free software that everyone
can redistribute and change. You can do so by
permitting redistribution under these terms (or,
alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary
General Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices
to the library. It is safest to attach them to the
start of each source file to most effectively convey
the exclusion of warranty; and each file should
have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to
where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the library’s name and an idea
of what it does.> Copyright (C) <year> <name
of author>
This library is free software; you can redistribute
it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU
Lesser General Public License as published by
the Free Software Foundation; either version
2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later
version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will
be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser
General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU
Lesser General Public License along with
this library; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330,
Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Also add information on how to contact you by
electronic and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work
as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a
“copyright disclaimer” for the library, if necessary.
Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright
interest in the library `Frob’ (a library for
tweaking knobs) written by James Random
Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990
Ty Coon, President of Vice
That’s all there is to it!
151
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
Mozilla Public License 1.1 (MPL 1.1)
1. Definitions.
1.0.1. “Commercial Use”
means distribution or otherwise making the
Covered Code available to a third party.
1.1. ‘’Contributor’’
means each entity that creates or contributes
to the creation of Modifications.
1.2. ‘’Contributor Version’’
means the combination of the Original Code,
prior Modifications used by a Contributor,
and the Modifications made by that particular
Contributor.
1.3. ‘’Covered Code’’
means the Original Code or Modifications
or the combination of the Original Code and
Modifications, in each case including portions
thereof.
1.4. ‘’Electronic Distribution Mechanism’’
means a mechanism generally accepted in
the software development community for the
electronic transfer of data.
1.5. ‘’Executable’’
means Covered Code in any form other than
Source Code.
1.6. ‘’Initial Developer’’
means the individual or entity identified as the
Initial Developer in the Source Code notice
required by Exhibit A.
1.7. ‘’Larger Work’’
means a work which combines Covered Code
or portions thereof with code not governed by
the terms of this License.
1.8. ‘’License’’
means this document.
1.8.1. “Licensable”
means having the right to grant, to the
maximum extent possible, whether at the
time of the initial grant or subsequently
acquired, any and all of the rights conveyed
herein.
1.9. ‘’Modifications’’
means any addition to or deletion from the
substance or structure of either the Original
Code or any previous Modifications. When
Covered Code is released as a series of files,
a Modification is:
(a) Any addition to or deletion from the
contents of a file containing Original Code
or previous Modifications.
(b) Any new file that contains any part of the
Original Code or previous Modifications.
1.10. ‘’Original Code’’
means Source Code of computer software
code which is described in the Source Code
notice required by Exhibit A as Original Code,
and which, at the time of its release under
this License is not already Covered Code
governed by this License.
1.10.1. “Patent Claims”
means any patent claim(s), now owned
or hereafter acquired, including without
limitation, method, process, and apparatus
claims, in any patent Licensable by grantor.
1.11. ‘’Source Code’’
means the preferred form of the Covered
Code for making modifications to it, including
all modules it contains, plus any associated
interface definition files, scripts used to
control compilation and installation of an
Executable, or source code differential
comparisons against either the Original
Code or another well known, available
Covered Code of the Contributor’s choice.
The Source Code can be in a compressed
or archival form, provided the appropriate
decompression or de-archiving software is
widely available for no charge.
1.12. “You’’ (or “Your”)
means an individual or a legal entity
exercising rights under, and complying with
all of the terms of, this License or a future
version of this License issued under Section
6.1.For legal entities, “You’’ includes any
entity which controls, is controlled by, or
is under common control with You. For
152
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
purposes of this definition, “control’’ means
(a) the power, direct or indirect, to cause
the direction or management of such entity,
whether by contract or otherwise, or (b)
ownership of more than fifty percent (50%)
of the outstanding shares or beneficial
ownership of such entity.
2. Source Code License.
2.1. The Initial Developer Grant.
The Initial Developer hereby grants You a
world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license,
subject to third party intellectual property
claims:
(a) under intellectual property rights (other
than patent or trademark) Licensable by
Initial Developer to use, reproduce, modify,
display, perform, sublicense and distribute
the Original Code (or portions thereof) with
or without Modifications, and/or as part of a
Larger Work; and
(b) under Patents Claims infringed by the
making, using or selling of Original Code, to
make, have made, use, practice, sell, and
offer for sale, and/or otherwise dispose of
the Original Code (or portions thereof).
(c) the licenses granted in this Section 2.1(a)
and (b) are effective on the date Initial
Developer first distributes Original Code
under the terms of this License.
(d) Notwithstanding Section 2.1(b) above,
no patent license is granted: 1) for code
that You delete from the Original Code; 2)
separate from the Original Code; or 3) for
infringements caused by: i) the modification
of the Original Code or ii) the combination
of the Original Code with other software or
devices.
2.2. Contributor Grant.
Subject to third party intellectual property
claims, each Contributor hereby grants You a
world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license
(a) under intellectual property rights (other
than patent or trademark) Licensable
by Contributor, to use, reproduce,
modify, display, perform, sublicense and
distribute the Modifications created by
such Contributor (or portions thereof)
either on an unmodified basis, with other
Modifications, as Covered Code and/or as
part of a Larger Work; and
(b) under Patent Claims infringed by the
making, using, or selling of Modifications
made by that Contributor either alone
and/or in combination with its Contributor
Version (or portions of such combination),
to make, use, sell, offer for sale, have
made, and/or otherwise dispose of: 1)
Modifications made by that Contributor (or
portions thereof); and 2) the combination
of Modifications made by that Contributor
with its Contributor Version (or portions of
such combination).
(c) the licenses granted in Sections 2.2(a) and
2.2(b) are effective on the date Contributor
first makes Commercial Use of the Covered
Code.
(d) Notwithstanding Section 2.2(b) above, no
patent license is granted: 1) for any code
that Contributor has deleted from the
Contributor Version; 2) separate from the
Contributor Version; 3) for infringements
caused by: i) third party modifications of
Contributor Version or ii) the combination
of Modifications made by that Contributor
with other software (except as part of the
Contributor Version) or other devices; or 4)
under Patent Claims infringed by Covered
Code in the absence of Modifications made
by that Contributor.
3. Distribution Obligations.
3.1. Application of License.
The Modifications which You create or to
which You contribute are governed by the
terms of this License, including without
limitation Section 2.2. The Source Code
version of Covered Code may be distributed
only under the terms of this License or a
future version of this License released under
Section 6.1, and You must include a copy of
this License with every copy of the Source
Code You distribute. You may not offer
or impose any terms on any Source Code
153
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
version that alters or restricts the applicable
version of this License or the recipients’ rights
hereunder. However, You may include an
additional document offering the additional
rights described in Section 3.5.
3.2. Availability of Source Code.
Any Modification which You create or to
which You contribute must be made available
in Source Code form under the terms of
this License either on the same media as
an Executable version or via an accepted
Electronic Distribution Mechanism to anyone
to whom you made an Executable version
available; and if made available via Electronic
Distribution Mechanism, must remain
available for at least twelve (12) months after
the date it initially became available, or at least
six (6) months after a subsequent version
of that particular Modification has been
made available to such recipients. You are
responsible for ensuring that the Source Code
version remains available even if the Electronic
Distribution Mechanism is maintained by a
third party.
3.3. Description of Modifications.
You must cause all Covered Code to which
You contribute to contain a file documenting
the changes You made to create that Covered
Code and the date of any change. You must
include a prominent statement that the
Modification is derived, directly or indirectly,
from Original Code provided by the Initial
Developer and including the name of the Initial
Developer in (a) the Source Code, and (b) in
any notice in an Executable version or related
documentation in which You describe the
origin or ownership of the Covered Code.
3.4. Intellectual Property Matters
(a) Third Party Claims.
If Contributor has knowledge that a license
under a third party’s intellectual property rights
is required to exercise the rights granted by
such Contributor under Sections 2.1 or 2.2,
Contributor must include a text file with the
Source Code distribution titled “LEGAL’’ which
describes the claim and the party making
the claim in sufficient detail that a recipient
will know whom to contact. If Contributor
obtains such knowledge after the Modification
is made available as described in Section
3.2, Contributor shall promptly modify the
LEGAL file in all copies Contributor makes
available thereafter and shall take other steps
(such as notifying appropriate mailing lists or
newsgroups) reasonably calculated to inform
those who received the Covered Code that new
knowledge has been obtained.
(b) Contributor APIs.
If Contributor’s Modifications include an
application programming interface and
Contributor has knowledge of patent licenses
which are reasonably necessary to implement
that API, Contributor must also include this
information in the LEGAL file.
(c) Representations.
Contributor represents that, except as disclosed
pursuant to Section 3.4(a) above, Contributor
believes that Contributor’s Modifications
are Contributor’s original creation(s) and/or
Contributor has sufficient rights to grant the
rights conveyed by this License.
3.5. Required Notices.
You must duplicate the notice in Exhibit A
in each file of the Source Code. If it is not
possible to put such notice in a particular
Source Code file due to its structure, then You
must include such notice in a location (such
as a relevant directory) where a user would be
likely to look for such a notice. If You created
one or more Modification(s) You may add your
name as a Contributor to the notice described
in Exhibit A. You must also duplicate this
License in any documentation for the Source
Code where You describe recipients’ rights
or ownership rights relating to Covered Code.
You may choose to offer, and to charge
a fee for, warranty, support, indemnity or
liability obligations to one or more recipients
of Covered Code. However, You may do so
only on Your own behalf, and not on behalf
of the Initial Developer or any Contributor
You must make it absolutely clear than any
such warranty, support, indemnity or liability
obligation is offered by You alone, and You
hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer
and every Contributor for any liability incurred
by the Initial Developer or such Contributor
154
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
as a result of warranty, support, indemnity or
liability terms You offer.
3.6. Distribution of Executable Versions.
You may distribute Covered Code in
Executable form only if the requirements
of Section 3.1-3.5 have been met for that
Covered Code, and if You include a notice
stating that the Source Code version of the
Covered Code is available under the terms
of this License, including a description
of how and where You have fulfilled the
obligations of Section 3.2. The notice must
be conspicuously included in any notice in an
Executable version, related documentation
or collateral in which You describe recipients’
rights relating to the Covered Code. You
may distribute the Executable version of
Covered Code or ownership rights under a
license of Your choice, which may contain
terms different from this License, provided
that You are in compliance with the terms
of this License and that the license for the
Executable version does not attempt to limit
or alter the recipient’s rights in the Source
Code version from the rights set forth in this
License. If You distribute the Executable
version under a different license You must
make it absolutely clear that any terms which
differ from this License are offered by You
alone, not by the Initial Developer or any
Contributor. You hereby agree to indemnify
the Initial Developer and every Contributor for
any liability incurred by the Initial Developer or
such Contributor as a result of any such terms
You offer.
3.7. Larger Works.
You may create a Larger Work by combining
Covered Code with other code not governed
by the terms of this License and distribute
the Larger Work as a single product. In such a
case, You must make sure the requirements
of this License are fulfilled for the Covered
Code.
4. Inability to Comply Due to Statute or Regulation.
If it is impossible for You to comply with any
of the terms of this License with respect to
some or all of the Covered Code due to statute,
judicial order, or regulation then You must: (a)
comply with the terms of this License to the
maximum extent possible; and (b) describe
the limitations and the code they affect. Such
description must be included in the LEGAL file
described in Section 3.4 and must be included
with all distributions of the Source Code. Except
to the extent prohibited by statute or regulation,
such description must be sufficiently detailed
for a recipient of ordinary skill to be able to
understand it.
5. Application of this License.
This License applies to code to which the Initial
Developer has attached the notice in Exhibit A
and to related Covered Code.
6. Versions of the License.
6.1. New Versions.
Netscape Communications Corporation
(‘’Netscape’’) may publish revised and/or new
versions of the License from time to time.
Each version will be given a distinguishing
version number.
6.2. Effect of New Versions.
Once Covered Code has been published
under a particular version of the License, You
may always continue to use it under the terms
of that version. You may also choose to use
such Covered Code under the terms of any
subsequent version of the License published
by Netscape. No one other than Netscape
has the right to modify the terms applicable to
Covered Code created under this License.
6.3. Derivative Works.
If You create or use a modified version of
this License (which you may only do in
order to apply it to code which is not already
Covered Code governed by this License),
You must (a) rename Your license so that
the phrases ‘’Mozilla’’, ‘’MOZILLAPL’’,
‘’MOZPL’’, ‘’Netscape’’, “MPL”, ‘’NPL’’ or
any confusingly similar phrase do not appear
in your license (except to note that your
license differs from this License) and (b)
otherwise make it clear that Your version of
the license contains terms which differ from
the Mozilla Public License and Netscape
Public License. (Filling in the name of the
Initial Developer, Original Code or Contributor
in the notice described in Exhibit A shall not of
155
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
themselves be deemed to be modifications of
this License.)
7. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY.
COVERED CODE IS PROVIDED UNDER
THIS LICENSE ON AN “AS IS’’ BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT
THE COVERED CODE IS FREE OF DEFECTS,
MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE
ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE COVERED CODE IS
WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY COVERED CODE
PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU
(NOT THE INITIAL DEVELOPER OR ANY
OTHER CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST
OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR
OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF
WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL
PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF
ANY COVERED CODE IS AUTHORIZED
HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS
DISCLAIMER.
8. TERMINATION.
8.1. This License and the rights granted hereunder
will terminate automatically if You fail to
comply with terms herein and fail to cure such
breach within 30 days of becoming aware of
the breach. All sublicenses to the Covered
Code which are properly granted shall survive
any termination of this License. Provisions
which, by their nature, must remain in effect
beyond the termination of this License shall
survive.
8.2. If You initiate litigation by asserting a patent
infringement claim (excluding declatory
judgment actions) against Initial Developer
or a Contributor (the Initial Developer or
Contributor against whom You file such action
is referred to as “Participant”) alleging that:
(a) such Participant’s Contributor Version
directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then
any and all rights granted by such Participant
to You under Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 of this
License shall, upon 60 days notice from
Participant terminate prospectively, unless
if within 60 days after receipt of notice You
either: (i) agree in writing to pay Participant
a mutually agreeable reasonable royalty for
Your past and future use of Modifications
made by such Participant, or (ii) withdraw Your
litigation claim with respect to the Contributor
Version against such Participant. If within
60 days of notice, a reasonable royalty and
payment arrangement are not mutually agreed
upon in writing by the parties or the litigation
claim is not withdrawn, the rights granted by
Participant to You under Sections 2.1 and/or
2.2 automatically terminate at the expiration of
the 60 day notice period specified above.
(b) any software, hardware, or device, other
than such Participant’s Contributor Version,
directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then
any rights granted to You by such Participant
under Sections 2.1(b) and 2.2(b) are revoked
effective as of the date You first made, used,
sold, distributed, or had made, Modifications
made by that Participant.
8.3. If You assert a patent infringement claim
against Participant alleging that such
Participant’s Contributor Version directly or
indirectly infringes any patent where such
claim is resolved (such as by license or
settlement) prior to the initiation of patent
infringement litigation, then the reasonable
value of the licenses granted by such
Participant under Sections 2.1 or 2.2 shall be
taken into account in determining the amount
or value of any payment or license. 8.4. In
the event of termination under Sections 8.1
or 8.2 above, all end user license agreements
(excluding distributors and resellers) which
have been validly granted by You or any
distributor hereunder prior to termination shall
survive termination.
9. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER
NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT,
OR OTHERWISE, SHALL YOU, THE INITIAL
DEVELOPER, ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR, OR
ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF COVERED CODE, OR
ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE
LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING,
156
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR
LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE,
COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION,
OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL
DAMAGES OR LOSSES, EVEN IF SUCH
PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY
TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL
INJURY RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY’S
NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE
LAW PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THIS
EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT
APPLY TO YOU.
10. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS.
The Covered Code is a ‘’commercial item,’’ as
that term is defined in 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct.
1995), consisting of ‘’commercial computer
software’’ and ‘’commercial computer
software documentation,’’ as such terms
are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept. 1995).
Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48
C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June
1995), all U.S. Government End Users acquire
Covered Code with only those rights set forth
herein.
11. MISCELLANEOUS.
This License represents the complete
agreement concerning subject matter hereof.
If any provision of this License is held to
be unenforceable, such provision shall be
reformed only to the extent necessary to
make it enforceable. This License shall
be governed by California law provisions
(except to the extent applicable law, if any,
provides otherwise), excluding its conflict-of-
law provisions. With respect to disputes in
which at least one party is a citizen of, or an
entity chartered or registered to do business
in the United States of America, any litigation
relating to this License shall be subject to
the jurisdiction of the Federal Courts of the
Northern District of California, with venue
lying in Santa Clara County, California, with the
losing party responsible for costs, including
without limitation, court costs and reasonable
attorneys’ fees and expenses. The application
of the United Nations Convention on Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods is expressly
excluded. Any law or regulation which
provides that the language of a contract shall
be construed against the drafter shall not apply
to this License.
12. RESPONSIBILITY FOR CLAIMS.
As between Initial Developer and the
Contributors, each party is responsible for
claims and damages arising, directly or
indirectly, out of its utilization of rights under
this License and You agree to work with Initial
Developer and Contributors to distribute such
responsibility on an equitable basis. Nothing
herein is intended or shall be deemed to
constitute any admission of liability.
13. MULTIPLE-LICENSED CODE.
Initial Developer may designate portions of the
Covered Code as Multiple-Licensed. Multiple-
Licensed means that the Initial Developer
permits you to utilize portions of the Covered
Code under Your choice of the MPL or the
alternative licenses, if any, specified by the
Initial Developer in the file described in Exhibit
A.
EXHIBIT A -Mozilla Public License.
``The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla
Public License Version 1.1 (the “License”); you
may not use this file except in compliance with
the License. You may obtain a copy of the License
at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
Software distributed under the License is
distributed on an “AS IS”basis, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or
implied. See the License for the specific language
governing rights and limitations under the License.
The Original Code is _______________________.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is
________________________.
Portions created by ______________________ are
Copyright (C) _______________________.
All Rights Reserved.
Contributor(s): ________________________.
Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used
under the terms of the _____ license (the [___]
License), in which case the provisions of [______]
157
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
License are applicable instead of those above.If
you wish to allow use of your version of this file
only under the terms of the [____] License and
not to allow others to use your version of this file
under the MPL, indicate your decision by deleting
the provisions above and replace them with the
notice and other provisions required by the [___]
License. If you do not delete the provisions above,
a recipient may use your version of this file under
either the MPL or the [___] License.”
[NOTE: The text of this Exhibit A may differ slightly
from the text of the notices in the Source Code
files of the Original Code. You should use the text
of this Exhibit A rather than the text found in the
Original Code Source Code for Your Modifications.]
Apache License Version 2.0
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE,
REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Definitions.
“License” shall mean the terms and conditions
for use, reproduction, and distribution as
defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this
document.
“Licensor” shall mean the copyright owner or
entity authorized by the copyright owner that is
granting the License.
“Legal Entity” shall mean the union of the
acting entity and all other entities that control,
are controlled by, or are under common
control with that entity. For the purposes of
this definition, “control” means (i) the power,
direct or indirect, to cause the direction or
management of such entity, whether by
contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty
percent (50%) or more of the outstanding
shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such
entity.
“You” (or “Your”) shall mean an individual or
Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by
this License.
“Source” form shall mean the preferred form
for making modifications, including but not
limited to software source code, documentation
source, and configuration files.
“Object” form shall mean any form
resulting from mechanical transformation or
translation of a Source form, including but not
limited to compiled object code, generated
documentation, and conversions to other media
types.
“Work” shall mean the work of authorship,
whether in Source or Object form, made
available under the License, as indicated by a
copyright notice that is included in or attached
to the work (an example is provided in the
Appendix below).
“Derivative Works” shall mean any work,
whether in Source or Object form, that is based
on (or derived from) the Work and for which the
editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or
other modifications represent, as a whole, an
158
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
original work of authorship. For the purposes of
this License, Derivative Works shall not include
works that remain separable from, or merely
link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the
Work and Derivative Works thereof.
“Contribution” shall mean any work of
authorship, including the original version of
the Work and any modifications or additions to
that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is
intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion
in the Work by the copyright owner or by an
individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on
behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes
of this definition, “submitted” means any form
of electronic, verbal, or written communication
sent to the Licensor or its representatives,
including but not limited to communication on
electronic mailing lists, source code control
systems, and issue tracking systems that are
managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for
the purpose of discussing and improving the
Work, but excluding communication that is
conspicuously marked or otherwise designated
in writing by the copyright owner as “Not a
Contribution.”
“Contributor” shall mean Licensor and any
individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a
Contribution has been received by Licensor and
subsequently incorporated within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the
terms and conditions of this License, each
Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual,
worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-
free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce,
prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display,
publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the
Work and such Derivative Works in Source or
Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the
terms and conditions of this License, each
Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual,
worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-
free, irrevocable (except as stated in this
section) patent license to make, have made,
use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise
transfer the Work, where such license applies
only to those patent claims licensable by such
Contributor that are necessarily infringed by
their Contribution(s) alone or by combination
of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which
such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You
institute patent litigation against any entity
(including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a
lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution
incorporated within the Work constitutes direct
or contributory patent infringement, then any
patent licenses granted to You under this
License for that Work shall terminate as of the
date such litigation is filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute
copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof
in any medium, with or without modifications,
and in Source or Object form, provided that You
meet the following conditions:
(a) You must give any other recipients of the
Work or Derivative Works a copy of this
License; and
(b) You must cause any modified files to carry
prominent notices stating that You changed
the files; and
(c) You must retain, in the Source form of any
Derivative Works that You distribute, all
copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution
notices from the Source form of the Work,
excluding those notices that do not pertain
to any part of the Derivative Works; and
(d) If the Work includes a “NOTICE” text file as
part of its distribution, then any Derivative
Works that You distribute must include a
readable copy of the attribution notices
contained within such NOTICE file, excluding
those notices that do not pertain to any part
of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the
following places: within a NOTICE text file
distributed as part of the Derivative Works;
within the Source form or documentation, if
provided along with the Derivative Works; or,
within a display generated by the Derivative
Works, if and wherever such third-party
notices normally appear. The contents of the
NOTICE file are for informational purposes
only and do not modify the License. You
may add Your own attribution notices
within Derivative Works that You distribute,
alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE
text from the Work, provided that such
additional attribution notices cannot be
construed as modifying the License.
159
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
You may add Your own copyright statement to
Your modifications and may provide additional
or different license terms and conditions for
use, reproduction, or distribution of Your
modifications, or for any such Derivative Works
as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction,
and distribution of the Work otherwise complies
with the conditions stated in this License.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You
explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution
intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work
by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms
and conditions of this License, without any
additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding
the above, nothing herein shall supersede
or modify the terms of any separate license
agreement you may have executed with
Licensor regarding such Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant
permission to use the trade names, trademarks,
service marks, or product names of the
Licensor, except as required for reasonable
and customary use in describing the origin of
the Work and reproducing the content of the
NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required
by applicable law or agreed to in writing,
Licensor provides the Work (and each
Contributor provides its Contributions) on an
“AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR
CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express
or implied, including, without limitation, any
warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-
INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
You are solely responsible for determining
the appropriateness of using or redistributing
the Work and assume any risks associated
with Your exercise of permissions under this
License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under
no legal theory, whether in tort (including
negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless
required by applicable law (such as deliberate
and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in
writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You
for damages, including any direct, indirect,
special, incidental, or consequential damages of
any character arising as a result of this License
or out of the use or inability to use the Work
(including but not limited to damages for loss
of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure
or malfunction, or any and all other commercial
damages or losses), even if such Contributor
has been advised of the possibility of such
damages.
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While
redistributing the Work or Derivative Works
thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge
a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty,
indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or
rights consistent with this License. However, in
accepting such obligations, You may act only on
Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility,
not on behalf of any other Contributor, and
only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and
hold each Contributor harmless for any liability
incurred by, or claims asserted against, such
Contributor by reason of your accepting any
such warranty or additional liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
160
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
MIT license
- cares
Copyright 1998 by the Massachusetts Institute
of Technology.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute
this software and its documentation for any
purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
provided that the above copyright notice appear
in all copies and that both that copyright notice
and this permission notice appear in supporting
documentation, and that the name of M.I.T. not
be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to
distribution of the software without specific,
written prior permission. M.I.T. makes no
representations about the suitability of this
software for any purpose.
It is provided “as is” without express or implied
warranty.
- curl
Copyright (C) 1998 - 2005, Daniel Stenberg,
<daniel@haxx.se>, et al.
This software is licensed as described in the
file COPYING, which you should have received
as part of this distribution. The terms are also
available at http://curl.haxx.se/docs/copyright.
html. You may opt to use, copy, modify, merge,
publish, distribute and/or sell copies of the
Software, and permit persons to whom the
Software is furnished to do so, under the terms
of the COPYING file.
This software is distributed on an “AS IS” basis,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either
express or implied.
- fontconfig
Copyright (c) 2000 Keith Packard
Copyright (c) 2005 Patrick Lam
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute,
and sell this software and its documentation
for any purpose is hereby granted without fee,
provided that the above copyright notice appear
in all copies and that both that copyright notice
and this permission notice appear in supporting
documentation, and that the name of Keith
Packard not be used in advertising or publicity
pertaining to distribution of the software without
specific, written prior permission. Keith Packard
makes no representations about the suitability of
this software for any purpose.
It is provided “as is” without express or implied
warranty.
KEITH PACKARD DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE,
INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN
NO EVENT SHALL KEITH PACKARD BE
LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
- libcurl
Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, Daniel Stenberg,
<daniel@haxx.se>.
All rights reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute
this software for any purpose with or without
fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
copyright notice and this permission notice
appear in all copies.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE
OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a
copyright holder shall not be used in advertising
or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other
dealings in this Software without prior written
authorization of the copyright holder.
161
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
- libxml2
Copyright (C) 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All
Rights Reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge,
to any person obtaining a copy of this software
and associated documentation files (the
“Software”), to deal in the Software without
restriction, including without limitation the rights
to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Software
is furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included in all copies or substantial
portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
DANIEL VEILLARD BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE
USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of
Daniel Veillard shall not be used in advertising
or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other
dealings in this Software without prior written
authorization from him
- libxslt
Copyright (C) 2001-2002 Daniel Veillard.
Copyright (C) 2001-2002 Thomas Broyer, Charlie
Bozeman and Daniel Veillard.
All Rights Reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge,
to any person obtaining a copy of this software
and associated documentation files (the
“Software”), to deal in the Software without
restriction, including without limitation the rights
to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Software
is furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included in all copies or substantial
portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER
DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of
Daniel Veillard shall not be used in advertising
or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other
dealings in this Software without prior written
authorization from him.
- lua interpreter
Copyright © 1994–2010 Lua.org, PUC-Rio.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge,
to any person obtaining a copy of this software
and associated documentation files (the
“Software”), to deal in the Software without
restriction, including without limitation the rights
to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Software
is furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included in all copies or substantial
portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
162
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER
DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Expat license
The source package was downloaded from
<URL:http://expat.sourceforge.net>.
The original packager is Adam Di Carlo <aph@
debian.org>.
The current maintainer is Ardo van Rangelrooij
<ardo@debian.org>.
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source
Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006
Expat maintainers.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the “Software”),
to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use, copy,
modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense,
and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit
persons to whom the Software is furnished to do
so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included in all copies or substantial
portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS
IN THE SOFTWARE.
The FreeType Project LICENSE
Copyright 1996-2002, 2006 by David Turner,
Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg
Introduction
The FreeType Project is distributed in several
archive packages; some of them may contain, in
addition to the FreeType font engine, various tools
and contributions which rely on, or relate to, the
FreeType Project.
This license applies to all files found in such
packages, and which do not fall under their
own explicit license. The license affects thus
the FreeType font engine, the test programs,
documentation and makefiles, at the very least.
This license was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and
IJG (Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which
all encourage inclusion and use of free software
in commercial and freeware products alike. As a
consequence, its main points are that:
- We don’t promise that this software works.
However, we will be interested in any kind of
bug reports. (`as is’ distribution)
- You can use this software for whatever you
want, in parts or full form, without having to
pay us. (`royalty-free’ usage)
- You may not pretend that you wrote this
software. If you use it, or only parts of
it, in a program, you must acknowledge
somewhere in your documentation that you
have used the FreeType code. (`credits’)
We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion
of this software, with or without modifications, in
commercial products. We disclaim all warranties
covering The FreeType Project and assume no
liability related to The FreeType Project.
Finally, many people asked us for a preferred form
for a credit/disclaimer to use in compliance with
this license. We thus encourage you to use the
following text:
Portions of this software are copyright <year>
The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All
rights reserved.
Please replace <year> with the value from the
FreeType version you actually use.
163
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
Legal Terms
0. Definitions
Throughout this license, the terms `package’,
`FreeType Project’ and `FreeType archive’ refer
to the set of files originally distributed by the
authors (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and
Werner Lemberg) as the `FreeType Project’, be
they named as alpha, beta or final release.
`You’ refers to the licensee, or person using
the project, where `using’ is a generic term
including compiling the project’s source code
as well as linking it to form a `program’ or
`executable’. This program is referred to as `a
program using the FreeType engine’.
This license applies to all files distributed in
the original FreeType Project, including all
source code, binaries and documentation,
unless otherwise stated in the file in its original,
unmodified form as distributed in the original
archive. If you are unsure whether or not a
particular file is covered by this license, you
must contact us to verify this.
The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 1996-
2000 by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and
Werner Lemberg. All rights reserved except as
specified below.
1. No Warranty
THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED `AS
IS’ WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL
ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES
CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO
USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT.
2. Redistribution
This license grants a worldwide, royalty-free,
perpetual and irrevocable right and license
to use, execute, perform, compile, display,
copy, create derivative works of, distribute and
sublicense the FreeType Project (in both source
and object code forms) and derivative works
thereof for any purpose; and to authorize others
to exercise some or all of the rights granted
herein, subject to the following conditions:
- Redistribution of source code must retain
this license file (`FTL.TXT’) unaltered; any
additions, deletions or changes to the
original files must be clearly indicated in
accompanying documentation. The copyright
notices of the unaltered, original files must be
preserved in all copies of source files.
- Redistribution in binary form must provide
a disclaimer that states that the software is
based in part of the work of the FreeType
Team, in the distribution documentation.
We also encourage you to put an URL to the
FreeType web page in your documentation,
though this isn’t mandatory.
These conditions apply to any software derived
from or based on the FreeType Project, not just
the unmodified files. If you use our work, you
must acknowledge us. However, no fee need
be paid to us.
3. Advertising
Neither the FreeType authors and contributors
nor you shall use the name of the other for
commercial, advertising, or promotional
purposes without specific prior written
permission. We suggest, but do not require, that
you use one or more of the following phrases
to refer to this software in your documentation
or advertising materials: `FreeType Project’,
`FreeType Engine’, `FreeType library’, or
`FreeType Distribution’.
As you have not signed this license, you are
not required to accept it. However, as the
FreeType Project is copyrighted material, only
this license, or another one contracted with the
authors, grants you the right to use, distribute,
and modify it. Therefore, by using, distributing,
or modifying the FreeType Project, you indicate
that you understand and accept all the terms of
this license.
4. Contacts
There are two mailing lists related to FreeType:
freetype@nongnu.org
Discusses general use and applications of
FreeType, as well as future and wanted
additions to the library and distribution. If you
are looking for support, start in this list if you
haven’t found anything to help you in the
documentation.
164
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
freetype-devel@nongnu.org
Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals,
design issues, specific licenses, porting, etc.
Our home page can be found at http://www.
freetype.org
JPEG license
This software is copyright (C) 1991-1998, Thomas
G. Lane.
All Rights Reserved except as specified below.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify,
and distribute this software (or portions thereof)
for any purpose, without fee, subject to these
conditions:
(1) If any part of the source code for this software
is distributed, then this README file must be
included, with this copyright and no-warranty
notice unaltered; and any additions, deletions,
or changes to the original files must be clearly
indicated in accompanying documentation.
(2) If only executable code is distributed, then the
accompanying documentation must state that
“this software is based in part on the work of
the Independent JPEG Group”.
(3) Permission for use of this software is granted
only if the user accepts full responsibility for
any undesirable consequences; the authors
accept NO LIABILITY for damages of any kind.
OpenSSL License
Copyright (c) 1998-2008 The OpenSSL Project. All
rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or
use of this software must display the following
acknowledgment: “This product includes
software developed by the OpenSSL Project
for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.
openssl.org/)”
4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL
Project” must not be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software
without prior written permission. For written
permission, please contact openssl-core@
openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be
called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear
in their names without prior written permission
of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must
retain the following acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by
the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL
Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL
PROJECT ``AS IS’’ AND ANY EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT
OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
165
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software
written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
This product includes software written by Tim
Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Original SSLeay License
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@
cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by
Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
The implementation was written so as to conform
with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-
commercial use as long as the following conditions
are aheared to. The following conditions apply to
all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4,
RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL
code. The SSL documentation included with this
distribution is covered by the same copyright
terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@
cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such
any Copyright notices in the code are not to be
removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric
Young should be given attribution as the author
of the parts of the library used. This can be in the
form of a textual message at program startup or
in documentation (online or textual) provided with
the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or
use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
“This product includes cryptographic software
written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)”
The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the
rouines from the library being used are not
cryptographic related :-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or
a derivative thereof) from the apps directory
(application code) you must include an
acknowledgement:
“This product includes software written by Tim
Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC
YOUNG ``AS IS’’ AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically
available version or derivative of this code cannot
be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
copied and put under another distribution licence
[including the GNU Public Licence.]
166
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
zlib/libpng License
This product may contain open source software
licensed under zlib/libpng License.
Libmng : Copyright © 2000-2008 Gerard Juyn
(gerard@libmng.com)
Libpng : Copyright (c) 1998-2008 Glenn Randers-
Pehrson
(Version 0.96 Copyright (c) 1996, 1997 Andreas
Dilger)
(Version 0.88 Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy Eric
Schalnat, Group 42, Inc.)
Zlib : Copyright (C) 1995-2010 Jean-loup Gailly and
Mark Adler
This software is provided ‘as-is’, without any
express or implied warranty. In no event will the
authors be held liable for any damages arising
from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this
software for any purpose, including commercial
applications, and to alter it and redistribute it
freely, subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this software must not be
misrepresented; you must not claim that you
wrote the original software. If you use this
software in a product, an acknowledgment
in the product documentation would be
appreciated but is not required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked
as such, and must not be misrepresented as
being the original software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered from
any source distribution.
Jean-loup Gailly
Mark Adler
Portmap license
Most of the files, fall under the following copyright,
and are distributable under the terms of the BSD
license.
Copyright (c) 1983,1991 The Regents of the
University of California. ll rights reserved.
Some of the RPC code, is copyrighted by Sun
Microsystems, and is provided under the following
terms:
Sun RPC is a product of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
and is provided for unrestricted use provided
that this legend is included on all tape media
and as a part of the software program in whole
or part. Users may copy or modify Sun RPC
without charge, but are not authorized to license
or distribute it to anyone else except as part of a
product or program developed by the user or with
the express written consent of Sun Microsystems,
Inc.
SUN RPC IS PROVIDED AS IS WITH NO
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING THE
WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTIBILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING,
USAGE OR TRADE PRACTICE.
Sun RPC is provided with no support and without
any obligation on the part of Sun Microsystems,
Inc. to assist in its use, correction, modification or
enhancement.
SUN MICROSYSTEMS, INC. SHALL HAVE
NO LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO THE
INFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHTS, TRADE
SECRETS OR ANY PATENTS BY SUN RPC OR
ANY PART THEREOF.
In no event will Sun Microsystems, Inc. be liable
for any lost revenue or profits or other special,
indirect and consequential damages, even if
Sun has been advised of the possibility of such
damages.
Sun Microsystems, Inc.
2550 Garcia Avenue
167
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
Pixman license
Copyright 1987, 1988, 1989, 1998 The Open
Group
Copyright 1987, 1988, 1989 Digital Equipment
Corporation
Copyright 1999, 2004, 2008 Keith Packard
Copyright 2000 SuSE, Inc.
Copyright 2000 Keith Packard, member of The
XFree86 Project, Inc.
Copyright 2004, 2005, 2007, 2008 Red Hat, Inc.
Copyright 2004 Nicholas Miell
Copyright 2005 Lars Knoll & Zack Rusin, Trolltech
Copyright 2005 Trolltech AS
Copyright 2007 Luca Barbato
Copyright 2008 Aaron Plattner, NVIDIA Corporation
Copyright 2008 Rodrigo Kumpera
Copyright 2008 André Tupinambá
Copyright 2008 Mozilla Corporation
Copyright 2008 Frederic Plourde
Copyright 2009 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the “Software”),
to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use, copy,
modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense,
and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit
persons to whom the Software is furnished to do
so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice (including the next paragraph) shall be
included in all copies or substantial portions of the
Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS
IN THE SOFTWARE.
X.net license
Copyright (c) 1995-2001 International Business
Machines Corporation and others
All rights reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the “Software”),
to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use,
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/
or sell copies of the Software, and to permit
persons to whom the Software is furnished to do
so, provided that the above copyright notice(s)
and this permission notice appear in all copies of
the Software and that both the above copyright
notice(s) and this permission notice appear in
supporting documentation.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER
OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL
INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,
ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a
copyright holder shall not be used in advertising
or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other
dealings in this Software without prior written
authorization of the copyright holder.
168
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
BSD license
- netBSD
Copyright (c) 1998 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to
The NetBSD Foundation by Lennart Augustsson
(lennart@augustsson.net) at Carlstedt Research &
Technology.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or
use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed
by the NetBSD Foundation, Inc. and its
contributors.
4. Neither the name of The NetBSD Foundation
nor the names of its contributors may be used
to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD
FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS
``AS IS’’ AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) OWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
- Simple XML Parser
Copyright (c) 2001-2002 Bruno Essmann
<essmann@users.sourceforge.net>
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. The name of the author may not be used to
endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
AUTHOR ``AS IS’’ AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
169
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
- xyssl
Copyright (C) 2006-2008 Christophe Devine
Copyright (C) 2009 Paul Bakker <polarssl_
maintainer at polarssl dot org>
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. Neither the names of PolarSSL or XySSL nor
the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
RSA Data Security license
Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc.
Created 1991. All rights reserved.
License to copy and use this software is granted
provided that it is identified as the “RSA Data
Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm” in
all material mentioning or referencing this software
or this function.
License is also granted to make and use derivative
works provided that such works are identified
as “derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc.
MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm” in all material
mentioning or referencing the derived work.
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations
concerning either the merchantability of this
software or the suitability of this software for any
particular purpose. It is provided “as is” without
express or implied warranty of any kind.
These notices must be retained in any copies of
any part of this documentation and/or software.
170
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
JSON license
Copyright (c) 2005 JSON.org
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the “Software”),
to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use, copy,
modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense,
and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit
persons to whom the Software is furnished to do
so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included in all copies or substantial
portions of the Software.
The Software shall be used for Good, not Evil.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS
IN THE SOFTWARE.
MS92 license
Copyright (C) 1992 Michael Sample and the
University of British Columbia
This library is free software; you can redistribute
it and/or modify it provided that this copyright/
license information is retained in original form.
If you modify this file, you must clearly indicate
your changes.
This source code is distributed in the hope
that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
171
ENG
ENGLISH
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
The model and serial numbers of the TV is
located on the back of the TV
Record it below should you ever need service.
MODEL
SERIAL
